Home

warning - Pontiac

1. D Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Power Steering Fluid on page 6 37 Engine Cooling Fan See Cooling System on page 6 30 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine Coolant Surge Tank See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 6 30 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 6 39 Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap Dipstick Out of View See Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines on page 6 27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine on page 6 28 Battery on page 6 42 See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6 119 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 When the hood on the 3 6 L V6 engine is opened Q i Sif N X lt Ke res NEG Le ie Ae Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Power Steering Fluid on page 6 37 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Electric Engine Cooling Fans Out of View
2. m Act Outlet Adjustment on page 4 24 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 4 4 Driver Shift Control See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3 24 If Equipped Cruise Control on page 4 7 If Equipped Driver Information Center DIC Buttons See Driver Information Center DIC on page 4 39 Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 25 Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 82 If Equipped Windshield Wipers on page 4 5 and Windshield Washer on page 4 6 Ignition Positions on page 3 20 Outlet Adjustment on page 4 24 Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 Audio System s on page 4 53 O9VOZS4r D n Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 13 Fog Lamps on page 4 12 If Equipped Hood Release on page 6 15 Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4 3 Horn on page 4 3 Climate Control System on page 4 16 or Automatic Climate Control System on page 4 20 Shift Lever See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3 24 Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 15 Traction and Stability Control Button See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 and Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 29 Glove Box on page 3 37 Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle For more detailed information refer to each of the feat
3. 2 72 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 2 65 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 2 65 When Should an Airbag Inflate 0 2 63 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 61 AND AGS ronime N a E abe 2 74 Passenger Status Indicator 0eee 4 29 Readiness Light c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 4 28 System Check cceceeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 2 59 AM ac cee tecnica tas n pn ieee erases ae taet eaaae bade senate 4 83 Antenna BaCkGlass isaenti vice laid ocean whee 4 84 Fixed Mas sscccaveis betcistsccngesepanieacastedatancaeenas 4 84 Antenna XM Satellite Radio Antenna SYSUOM soaron reii ree a ET 4 84 Antilock Brake System ABS W W u sseeeeereeerreree 5 4 Warning Light c 2ssi ar teehee ner 4 31 Appearance Care Aluminum Wheels 0 seeeeeneeeeeeee eres 6 112 Care of Safety Belts cecceeeeeee teste ees 6 110 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeee ees 6 114 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 6 111 Fabtic CarpetcivceScccivenescceatsencet dete seaetenestnees 6 108 IMIS Canes ccnacetacedtstasanncdndaysenabedadetndenes sions 6 111 Finish Damage Ssns urran anei 6 113 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUHaCces arsen ene aE a 6 109 Interior CleaniNg erenneren onns nains 6 107 Leather dsssnnianonrneana eaaa cae 6 109 Sheet Metal Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1
4. folowing ee ee Cm e PressKI SEEK or lt lt REV a ea e Turn Jd counterclockwise The date does not automatically display To see the ma TEOL m Peers i SEEK SEEK REV FWD AUX date press while the radio is on The date with display times out after a few seconds and goes back to the O normal radio and time display To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 oe hour or to change the date default setting from Radio with CD MP3 and USB Port shown Radio month day year to day month year with CD MP3 similar 1 Press and then the softkey located below the The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio forward arrow label Once the time 12H and 24H system and the date MM DD YYYY month day and year and DD MM YYYY day month and year displays 2 Press the softkey located below the desired option 3 Press again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 4 54 Radio Data System RDS The radio may have RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly
5. 4 32 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 4 33 FIASHHOSP ASS 556555 bure sundere redde hg 4 5 Highbeam ON cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eetika 4 38 Lights cont High Low Beam Changer eeeeeeee 4 5 Low Fuel Warning eeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 39 Oil Pressure cece ccc ec ec ee cece eee eneneeeaeeeeeeenes 4 37 On Reminder ccccc ec ee cece eee en eeeeeeeeeaeees 4 10 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 4 29 Safety Belt Reminders 4 27 SOCUMILY scssctizenhatiets casera keto aes ks 4 37 Tire Pressure oo ccc ccece cece ec ea eens eeeeeeeeseneeeees 4 33 Tractiom O RE E O 4 32 Loadingia CD persigan eir ann overt EEES 4 60 Loading Your Vehicle stenoses nonnii 5 18 Locks Automatic Door Lock 0 0eceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 9 Delayed Locking cccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 3 9 DOOM sirener ri E rE E EREA EEEa 3 8 Lockout Protection cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 11 Power DOOP eirias aa a ea aia 3 8 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock 3 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 10 Loss of Control cies cecescccseevetssiiclnetesetvesersedvedess 5 10 Low Fuel Warning Big hs raader 4 39 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 2 46 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop 008 3 38 Low Profile Performance Tire eeeeees 6 57 Lumbar Power Controls 0 c
6. 6 eeeeeeeeee ee 4 33 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 4 33 Cooling System cceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 6 30 Drive Belt Routing eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 7 12 EXMAUSE sessccccactecsdeucendis itis inten ei at badas valet 3 32 ON FEE a E eee 6 21 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 6 37 Overheating irr oser are ebdre 6 35 STAN eate a E E DRENGEN 3 21 Engine cont Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing 5 33 Engine Identification ce ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeee 6 114 Engine Oil Life System cceeee cece eee nece een iea ae 6 24 Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes 6 24 Entering Personalization Menu 0eeeee 4 48 Entry Exit Lighting iesirea Akad 4 13 Event Data Recorders eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 Exiting Personalization Menu 4 52 Express Down WindOW 231 i here ats iaens 3 15 Extender Safety Belt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 35 Exterior Miffors 22222 sneen Ar Dens averse Hos RER 1 10 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada 6 67 Filter Engine Air Cleaner cccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeee ee 6 26 Finding a Category CAT Station XM Satellite Radio Service Only cccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee ee 4 58 Finding a Statio rarere eee elelr 4 55 FINISH DAMAGE ja jriccncaniedennindesenatalahee ea 6 113 Fixed Mast A
7. ccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeea eee eeeeeaeenes 6 42 Ventilation Adjustment ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 4 24 MISOUS aks ctttna stata A E a RENE TERN 3 16 Voice Pass TA c icccdecctessencsseonennedateanendeneeneys 4 80 Voice Recognition ceeeceeeeeeeee nent eeeeeenes 4 72 17 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 4 24 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 06eeeeeeee 4 42 Hazard Flashers tics eiren acacia 4 3 Safety and Symbols sranani iE iv Weight of the Trailer eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 28 Weight of the Trailer Tongue eeeeeeeee ee 5 29 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use eee 6 23 What to Do with Used Oil eeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 25 What to USE 2 0 ccc ccc cc eee rese nr 6 32 6 38 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance cee 6 79 Different Size 2 0 0 cece cece cece eects een eeaeeneeeees 6 77 Replacement sii sceviea atts rr eee lee 6 79 When It Is Time for New Tires accenn 6 74 When the Change Oil Soon Message Displays 7 3 When to Add Engine Oil cceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 22 When to Change Engine Oil eeeeeeeeee 6 24 When tO GheCk 230 ror ere aner bebo heste 6 65 When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission FIUIC 5552 rese hkr rare hende 6 28 When to Check Power Steering Fluid 6 37 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 26 Where to Put the
8. HVAC CTAL BATT IGN SENSOA We i All he Ul NOT NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED AIRBAG BATT SPARE FUSE HOLDER SPARE FUSE OLDER FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSE HOLDER SPARE FUSE HOLDER AIRBAG BATT Airbag Battery CLUSTER Instrument Panel Cluster THEFT Theft Deterrent System AIRBAG IGN Airbag Ignition DOOR LOCK _ Door Locks 6 117 Fuses Usage EPS Electronic Power Steering FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning BLOWER Blower Switch HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning BLOWER HIGH Blower High Speed Relay Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Control Diagnostic Link Connector Battery HVAC CTRL BATT HVAC CTRL Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning IGN Control Ignition IGN SENSOR Ignition Switch INTERIOR LIGHTS Interior Lamps NOT INSTALLED __ Not Used NOT INSTALLED __ Not Used 6 118 NOT INSTALLED __ Not Used NOT INSTALLED __ Not Used MIRRORS CGS Power Windows Sedan RADIO Audio System Sunroof Heated Seat Power Windows Coupe Retractable Hardtop Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Compass Cruise Control Switch Passenger RUN CRANK Airbag Status Indicator DSC Switch ROOF HEAT SEAT C Fuses Us Engine Compartment Fuse Block SPARE FUSE The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
9. WARNING Continued Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle From the outside use your key or if your vehicle has one the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door Turn the key clockwise to lock the door From the inside use the manual lock knobs or the power lock switches Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s door Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all doors Press the inboard side of the switch to lock all doors The rear doors do not have power door lock switches Rear seat passengers must use the manual lock knob on their doors Door Ajar Reminder A chime will sound and the DOOR AJAR message will display if one of the doors is not fully closed This happens when the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of P Park or N Neutral See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Delayed Locking This feature lets the driver to delay the locking of the vehicle It will not operate with the key in the ignition See Lockout Protection on page 3 11 Press the driver s power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock button once With the key removed from the ignition and the driver
10. 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 3 29 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into P Park by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 30 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand the vehicle is in P Park Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A WARNING It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into P Park hold the brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the automatic transmission into P Park properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
11. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return to the booster seat e If you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster 2 36 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and A WARNING get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face Never do this or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the It should never be worn over the abdomen which impact forces In a crash the two children can be could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in crushed together and seriously injured A safety a crash belt must be used by only one person at a time Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2
12. 3 26 Notice Driving in LOW L for more than 25 miles 40 km or at speeds over 55 mph 90 km h may damage the transmission Also shifting into LOW L at speeds above 65 mph 105 km h can cause damage Drive in THIRD 3 or DRIVE D instead of LOW L Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place M Manual Mode This position allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission If the vehicle has this feature see Manual Shift Mode MSM following Manual Shift Mode MSM If Equipped To use this feature 1 Move the shift lever from D Drive rearward into the M Manual Mode While driving in manual mode the transmission will remain in the driver selected gear 2 Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift The odometer display on the instrument panel cluster will change from vehicle mileage to the letter M for manual shift mode and a number indicating the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Speedometer and Odometer on page 4 26 for more information While using the MSM feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and sportier performance You can use this for sport driving or when
13. 5 33 Charging System Light c eeeeeeeeeeeneee tenes 4 30 Check Engine LAMP 2552448 f ce Padesepeaaqeintesesencca omens 4 34 Check Engine Light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eenes 4 34 Checking Coolant irisi eea nia 6 32 Checking Engine Oil eeeeeeeeeeeeee neta eee eenes 6 21 Checking Things Under the Hood 055 6 14 Chemical Paint Spotting cceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 114 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children eeeeeeeeee 2 39 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 2 46 Older Childrenek eanan excess 2 36 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ae ale re rektor 2 54 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position sssseeeeeeereeerer 2 56 SYSTEMS so usd re ae kas teks medtomtinledia tases ERE EAE 2 42 Where to Put the Restraint eee 2 44 Cleaning Aluminum Wheels 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 112 Exterior Lamps Lenses sceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 111 Fabric Carpet ioc cccntetatscncnetaan PER nere DERNE 6 108 FINISH Gale Jescciacessaccass nenene tareni iran cane 6 111 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces arenaer 6 109 RL LET Ao aes E E E S 6 107 Leather icici epee cnhicedia napacaleieden aae n e 6 109 TGCS 5 cuca anata EA S 6 113 Cleaning cont Underbody Maintenance ceeeeeeeeeee 6 113 Washing Your Vehicle seceeeeeee eee eee e
14. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and WARNING Continued Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 WARNING Continued See High Speed Operation on page 6 66 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving 6 56 Low Profile Performance Tire If your vehicle has P225 50R18 or P225 50R17 size tires they are classified as low profile performance tires These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement You may also notice more road noise with low profile performance tires and that they tend to wear faster Notice If the vehicle has low profile tires they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires Tire and or wheel assembly damage
15. Press C6 to cancel the auto recirculation feature Each time the vehicle is started the system reverts to the auto recirculation function When the weather is cool or damp operating the system in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause fogging of the vehicle s windows To clear the fog select either defog or defrost Make sure the air conditioning is on Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning on or off A light above the button comes on while the air conditioning is on When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode the system runs the air conditioning automatically to cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle On hot days open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape This reduces the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down Then keep the windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best On cool but sunny days while using manual operation of the automatic system use bi level to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets To warm or cool the air press V or A to the desired temperature setting In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle Also the system maximizes its performance by using recirculation as necessary Heating On cold days when using manual operation of the automatic system choose floor mode to deliver air to the floor outlets To warm or cool the air delivered adjust th
16. Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear Z WARNING If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope A WARNING Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special
17. cccceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeees 5 17 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out 5 18 Loading the Vehicle cd bibel EEN 5 18 MOWING cite da iswettn devas eee a anal N aed 5 23 Towing Your Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeeerenees 5 23 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeee 5 23 TOWING a Trails 52 ci scsnaccoiainsagntanedioathavecsdonse 5 27 5 1 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 2 14 A WARNING Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving A WARNING Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in acab or if you are with a group de
18. ssseseneeee 6 4 California Proposition 65 Warning 006 6 5 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 5 Doing Your Own Service Work 0seeeeeee ees 6 5 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicles A E 6 6 UCI EE E E E E E NER 6 6 Gasoline Octane ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 7 Gasoline Specifications c eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 6 7 California Fuel 528 rr bukke REE nd used 6 7 Additives or er hes ees 6 8 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol sanser bedere 6 9 Fuels in Foreign Countries c eeeeeeeneee ees 6 11 Filling the TANK cc nic ecea seler Dred 6 11 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 05 6 13 Checking Things Under the Hood 6 14 Hood Release ocni aaa EEE 6 15 Engine Compartment Overview s es 6 16 Engine OM risiini SEE SEER ES SEES NE REDE EET 6 21 Engine Oil Life System W W u u ds sseeeeerererernnee 6 24 Engine Air Cleaner Filter c eeeeeeeeee ees 6 26 Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines 6 27 Automatic Transmission Fluid S 9L V6 Engine cssucistseiscivesiesaiiiseendeee 6 28 Cooling System ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 30 Engine Coolant eseese a anner 6 31 Engine Overheating cceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 35 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 6 37 Power Steering Fluid ccee
19. will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 Connect the red positive cable to the positive VAN WARNING terminal of the dead battery 7 Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you the positive terminal of the good battery Use a badly Keep your hands away from moving parts remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one once the engine is running 6 45 10 11 Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less
20. 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again repeat these steps This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 3 22 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy
21. 25 00 U S plus processing fee 8 15 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helminc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s
22. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 2 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 2 If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint raise it See Head Restraints on page 2 2 2 3 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using has a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts If the position you are using has a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts If the headrest or head restraint is adjustable pull up on the headrest or head restraint to access the top tether anchors If the headrest or head restraint is fixed there should be a gap to route the strap under the headrest or head restraint Do not route the top strap around the headrest or head restraint Push and pull the child restraint in different directions
23. The top tether anchors are located on the rear seatback filler panel Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Sedan Coupe Retractable hardtop models do not have top tether anchors to be used to secure a child restraint in any seating position Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 44 for additional information 2 49 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A WARNING Z WARNING Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor A WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Buckle any If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint wi
24. and Back Up Lamps 6 50 6 51 6 53 Buying NeW Tires 2 0 0 cece beer eects eee SLET ER 6 75 Calibration seners eean enie 3 35 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 6 5 Warno civ ctiscatectGheeetacusactveniel S TE 6 5 California Fuel ccceceececeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 7 Call Waiting cessaire n 4 78 Calling for Assistance ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 8 7 Canada Customer Assistance 0 eseeeeeees 8 6 Canadian Owners a 2i2 ssseisecseveres ianei ss saeeeescneveane iii Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens iii Canceling a Remote Start cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 5 Capacities and Specifications eeeee 6 125 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exnaust 22k tsvvctaaceeti noone 3 32 WONK aeaee a 3 11 Winter Driving caeciiesccnennencamciwieat asenin 5 15 Care of Safety Belts 28k serghunenin ieira 6 110 Gare of CDS asarira eaa 4 61 Care of the CD Player c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 4 62 CD Messages cseeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeens 4 61 CDS IMPS ces Eee a a E Eee 4 63 Cellular Phone Usage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 83 Center Console Storage ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 37 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL 6 49 6 50 Certification Label cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 22 Chains Mre sagrario enina i 6 81 Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
25. call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com pontiac Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find Pontiac dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers e Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links Pontiac www pontiac com Pontiac Merchandise www pontiacmall com Help Center www pontiac com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such
26. i Certified for Gasoline Engines Assembly Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Engine Oil j S d GM Part No U S 12346293 starburst symbol To determine the econaary art NO U o J9 proper viscosity for your vehicle s _ Latch in Canada 992723 or lubricant engine see Engine Oil on Pivots Spring meeting requirements of NLGI 2 page 6 21 Anchor and Category LB or GC LB number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Release Pawl 50 50 mixture of clean aunikaals Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube water and use only DEX COOL Hood and Door 4 Engine Coolant Coolant See Engine Coolant on GM Part No U S 12346241 page 6 31 in Canada 109435474 DOT 3H lic Brake Flui Weatherstrip Lubricant Hydraulic Brake 94 Par NG UG 88862808 GM Part No U S 3634770 System in Canada 88862807 i Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518 or Windshield Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease Optikleen Washer Solvent GM Part No U S 12345579 asher in Canada 992887 Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Po Pat GM Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers A1627C A1627C A2930C PF457G PF61 3 6L V6 Engine PF48 41 103 41 100 41 109 Driver Side 60 0 cm 24 0in 258064 CC Passenger Side 53 0 cm 21 2 in 25800623 0 Engine Drive Belt Routing 2 4L L4 Engine 3 5L V
27. s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 114 If the vehicle has the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 or the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code K you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 6 6 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 7 Only vehicles that have the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 or the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code K can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Many service stations will not have an 85 ethanol fuel E85 pump available The U S Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website www eere energy gov afdc infrastructure locator html that can help you find E85 fuel Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85 At a minimum E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 By definition this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70 and 85 Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on To ensure quick starts in the wintertime t
28. the tire The pressure gage D will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only 6 85 10 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage D The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 The pressure gage D may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached Notice If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes the vehicle should not be driven farther The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 11 Press the on off button A to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire therefore Steps 12 through 18 must be done immediately after Step 11 Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it cou
29. ACTIVE If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control ESC this message displays and the ESC light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when ESC is assisting you with directional control of the vehicle You may feel or hear the system working and see this message displayed in the DIC Slippery road conditions may exist when this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle This is normal when the system is operating See Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 and Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light on page 4 32 for more information ESC Electronic Stability Control OFF If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control ESC this message displays and the ESC OFF light on the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 and Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light on page 4 32 for more information ICE POSSIBLE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordingly 4 43 KEY FOB BATT Battery LOW This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter battery is low Replace the battery in the transmitter See Battery Replacement under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operatio
30. Defrost This mode clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly Air is directed to the windshield with some air directed to the floor vents In this mode the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle The air conditioning compressor runs unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing The air conditioning compressor operates although the indicator light is not on The air conditioning indicator light turns off when defrost is selected If the air conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode the indicator light turns on If the button is pressed again the light turns off Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode To help clear the windshield quickly do the following 1 Select the defrost mode 2 Select the highest temperature 3 Select the highest fan speed eS Outside Air Press the right side of the button to turn the outside air mode on An indicator light comes on to show that it is on Air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle The outside air mode can be used with all modes except the recirculation mode Press SY again to cancel the recirculation mode Ad Recirculation Press the left side of the button to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light comes on to show that it is on The air inside the vehicle is recirculated through the climate control system and throughout the vehicle not from outside This helps to limit the odors
31. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely If no coolant is visible in the surge tank add coolant as damaged follows 1 Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when 7 the cooling system including the coolant surge tank A WARNING pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise start up even when the engine is not running and about two or two and one half turns can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop This will away from any underhood electric fan allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose 6 33 2 Keep turning the pressure cap slowly P and remove it gr BALLON RESERVOIR D EXPANSION 105 kPa 9 DEX coole Q S ouypae 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark Wait about five minutes and then check to see if the level is below the mark If the level is below the FULL COLD mark add additional coolant to bring the level up to the mark Repeat this procedure until the level remains constant at the FULL COLD mark for at least five minutes 6 34 4 With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the u
32. If this happens contact the radio station Playing the Radio D Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV Radios with the Speed Compensated Volume SCV feature automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down so that the volume level is consistent To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM tab on the radio display 4 Press the softkey under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press to choose between FM AM or XM if equipped J Tune Turn to select radio stations K SEEK Press to seek or scan stations with a strong signal in the selected band To seek stations press and release KI SEEK to go to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold SEEK for a few seconds until the radio beeps once The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press K SEEK again to stop scanning 4 55 To scan preset stations in the selected band press and
33. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information Radio Frequency Statement This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that co
34. See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 34 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Tr
35. Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H V W and ZR speed rated tires If you choose winter tires with a lower speed rating never exceed the tire s maximum speed capability KO exme ao Z y 4 CA v S Pa Nouv ogee Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire Passenger P Metric Tire Example sidewall A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail 6 58 B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tir
36. button up After the adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position Safety Belt Pretensioners The vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met And if the vehicle has side impact airbags safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 2 75 2 31 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Sedan and Coupe Only This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides If not they are available through your dealer retailer The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed and properly adjusted the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head 2 32 Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 1 Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the inter
37. can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 and Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 4 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 30 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 100 km h 60 mph travels 20 m 66 feet That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake Th
38. hold the transmitter higher and try again Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section Ifthe transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 60 m 195 feet away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 3 3 r CD With Remote Start Shown Without Remote Start Similar Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press to operate the remote start feature See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3 5 Lock Press to lock all the doors The interior lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the remote lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn chirp and or the turn signals flash to confirm locking See LOCK HORN and LIGHT FLASH under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 Pressing o may also arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 3 16 A Unlock Press to unlock the driver door If A is pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors unlock The interior lamps turn on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the remote u
39. of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim front sensors or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger s seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers upholstery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 If you have any questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system A If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone number
40. or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly CAT Not Found There are no channels availa
41. pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 40 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 for an 6 68 example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 Your vehicle s TPMS system can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 and Tires on page 6 56 Notice Using non approved tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty Always use the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer retailer Factory installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant Using non approved tir
42. test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appeara
43. voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low 4 72 Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 82 for more information Eg Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition cx V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or to cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connect
44. 28 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 2 37 A WARNING Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 2 38 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle A WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the
45. 32 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5 18 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking
46. A WARNING Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 110 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would let fuel evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 34 The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC if the fuel cap is not properly installed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Z WARNING If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction in
47. C Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 6 56 for more information When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 66 for more information 4 34 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing
48. Check Infants and Young Children Restraints Inflation Tire Pressure Information Modes Instrument Panel Insuring Your Vehicle cscsssscsseeessseseesseeeeen Jump Starting Remote RKE System Keyless Entry System Labeling Tire Sidewall ececceeeeeeee eres 6 58 Lamps COUNMESY crastina dace heler nede R 4 13 Daytime Running DRL cece eee eee es 4 11 DOME scccscnsiceapsandt cacazcat slender 4 13 License PALS sccvacencccsncstenserestednecnsdeancetearenest 6 54 Malfunction Indicators renses rasen eee es 4 34 Reading we esiicddetainiincerheacehdertancddatiennaies aai 4 14 UNR Scetalncsh ave twcuearher sey saat E IEEE ENES 4 14 Lap Shoulder Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 28 Latch Seatback cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 2 10 LATCH System for Child Restraints 00 2 46 Leaving After Parking on a Hill acce 5 33 Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running 3 30 Lift Seat POW ariii ipene innoire 2 12 Lighting ERIE 2d52initvacdhonagne o OE E 4 13 Parade DIMMING 23 none rede ah 4 14 Eo Tai eE E wigs ieee Aiea 4 10 Airbag Readiness ceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 28 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 4 31 Brake System Warning cceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 30 Charging System cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 4 30 Cruise Control ciicitie cess eee he edad 4 38 Electronic StabiliTrak Control Indicator
49. Checks and Services on page 7 8 Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure check Radiator and air conditioning condenser outside cleaning See Cooling System on page 6 30 Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or damaged components Accelerator pedal check for damage high effort or binding Replace if needed If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit check the sealant expiration date printed on the instruction label of the kit See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 82 First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km 25 000 Miles Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks First Engine Oil Change After Every 80 000 km 50 000 Miles Engine air cleaner filter replacement See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Automatic transmission fluid change severe service for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather in hilly or mountainous terrain when frequently towing a trailer or used for taxi police or delivery service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines on page 6 27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine on page 6 28 First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km 100 000 Miles Automatic transmission fluid change normal service See Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines on page 6 27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine on page 6 28 Spark plug replace
50. HOLDER Spare Fuse Holder features listed SPARE FUSE The engine compartment fuse block is located on the HOLDER pare Fuse Holder driver side of the engine compartment near the battery SPARE FUSE Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components Fuse Hol HOLDER on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component ifht len Spare Fuse Holder STR WHL Steering Wheel Controls ILLUM Backlighting WIPER SW Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 6 119 EDEDED c 10 N N Jee 5 Cs Cos 7 Ce fej eB UC Q m Emission n o n 5 me 4 Transmission Control Module Ignition 1 Mass Airflow Sensor LY7 5 C 8 x SZ oO 8 rr o 10 5 CE 2 Ce CE 4 on Caj 8 Ja S CO e C L Air Conditioner Clutch Electronic Throttle Control Not Used 6 120 Fuses Usage Pe om CCS C o Fight Headlamp Low Beam 19 Run Relay Heating Ventilation ae Conditioning Blower ae oe ere oma 1 Electric Power Steering Transmission Control Module Battery Ignition Module LE5 LEQ LZ4 LZE LZ9 Odd Synder neces caition Coils LY7 Injectors LE5 LE9 LZ4 LZE LZ9 Even Cylinder Injectors Ignition Coils LY7 45 Rear Oxygen Sensors LZ4 LZE LZ9 LY7 Retractable Hardtop Regulated Voltage Control Antilock Brake System Battery 6 121 mes Tue 6 122 Does Usg Rear Compartment Fuse Block The rear compartment fuse bl
51. If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator all the way down Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 5 10 3 25 Notice If your vehicle seems to accelerate slowly or not shift gears when you go faster and you continue to drive your vehicle that way you could damage the transmission Have your vehicle serviced right away You can drive in L Low when you are driving less than 35 mph 56 km h and D Drive for higher speeds until then 3 Third This position is also used for normal driving However it reduces vehicle speed more than D Drive without using the brakes Here are some times you might choose 3 Third instead of D Drive When driving on hilly winding roads When towing a trailer so there is less shifting between gears e When going down a steep hill L Low This position reduces vehicle speed more than 3 Third without using the brakes You can use L Low on hills It can help control vehicle speed going down steep mountain roads along with using the brakes off and on You can use L Low on very steep hills in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is in L Low the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough
52. Install a new bulb Turn the bulb access cover clockwise to reinstall it Push the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle making sure to align the ball stud into its retainer Push the front fascia back into its original location Reinstall the plastic push pins on the top of the tire bar Reinstall the two screws that secure the headlamp assembly Aa Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Sedan To replace a center high mounted stoplamp CHMSL bulb Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 Locate the center high mounted stoplamp CHMSL on the inside of the trunk lid Disconnect the wiring harness SEH 4 _ _ E ER Remove the cover by pressing the tabs at either end with a tool 6 49 5 Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise 6 Turn the bulb clockwise to install it 7 Reinstall the cover and reconnect the wiring harness Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Retractable Hardtop and Coupe If your vehicle has this component and it needs replacement it is recommended that it be replaced as a unit by your dealer retailer 6 50 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps Sedan A Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal B Sidemarker Lamp C Back up Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 2 Remove the convenience net 3 Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim Remove the two n
53. It can damage the vehicle s i windshield washer system and paint There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for the location of the reservoir e The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well 6 39 Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A WARNING If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A WARNING With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work wel
54. Mast Antenna Retractable Hardtop The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base If the mast becomes slightly bent straighten it out by hand If the mast is badly bent replace it Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base If tightening is required tighten by hand Backglass Antenna Coupe and Sedan The AM FM antenna is integrated with the rear window defogger located in the rear window Make sure that the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged If the inside surface is damaged it could interfere with radio reception For proper radio reception the antenna connector needs to be properly attached to the post on the glass 4 84 If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to the glass make sure that the grid lines for the AM FM antenna are not damaged There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception Notice Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window antenna and or the rear window defogger Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects Notice Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere
55. System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 115 Finish Gare a ze antenie Vee NDA GER 6 111 Add On Electrical Equipment 6 115 Windshield and Wiper Blades 0055 6 112 Windshield Wiper Fuses eseeeeeeeee ees 6 115 Aluminum Wheels eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee ens 6 112 Power Windows and Other Power Options 6 115 TeS seer a n E re detente SEE 6 113 FUSES eoe E A E 6 116 Sheet Metal Damage scceeeeeeeeeee es 6 113 Instrument Panel Fuse Block 008 6 116 Finish Damage iv deivese vides seston ennen bs vader 6 113 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 64 6 119 Underbody Maintenance ceeeeeeeeee eee 6 113 Rear Compartment Fuse Block 0 08 6 122 Chemical Paint Spotting ceee 6 114 Capacities and Specifications 0 00 6 125 Vehicle Identification eee 6 114 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 114 Service Parts Identification Label 6 115 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco ig Parts EF Goodwrench ci Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance and
56. Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route There is a limit of six requests per year Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
57. Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axle see Certification Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 5 19 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 Example 1 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be transferred to your item Maximum Vehicle A Capacity Weight for 7 006 Ibs Example 1 vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle If your vehicle can tow a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 for important information Subtract Occupant on towing a trailer towing safety rules and Weight 68 k
58. a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior 6 108 Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used
59. an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the cigarette lighter Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window Start the vehicle The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor Turn the selector switch B counterclockwise to the Air Only position Press the on off A button to turn the compressor on The compressor will inflate the tire with air only 6 88 10 11 12 13 14 15 Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gage D The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 The pressure gage D may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading The compressor may be turned on off until the correct pressure is reached Press the on off button A to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage Unplug the power plug G from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Disconnect the air only hose E from the tire valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and replace the tire valve stem cap Replace the air only hose E and the power plug G and cord back in its original location Place the equipment in the o
60. any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 4 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the ke
61. as a cellular telephone There are two accessory power outlets located on the center console below the climate controls If the vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS one accessory power outlet is in the center storage console and the other is on the center console below the climate controls To use an outlet remove the protective cap See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 15 Performance and Maintenance Traction Control System TCS The traction control system limits wheel spin The system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is started To turn off traction control press and release te illuminates and the appropriate DIC message is displayed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Press and release the button again to turn on traction control For more information see Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 Electronic Stability Control ESC The Electronic Stability Control system assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions The system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is started To turn off both traction control and Electronic Stability Control press and hold 2 located below the Climate Controls until amp illuminates and the appropriate DIC message is displayed See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Press and release the button again to turn on both systems For more information see Electronic Stability Control ES
62. automatic transmission the vehicle cannot be dinghy towed If the vehicle does not have the 3 9L V6 engine with a four speed automatic transmission it can be dinghy towed 5 24 When dinghy towing the vehicle the vehicle should be run at the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about five minutes This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components For vehicles that can be dinghy towed with all four wheels on the ground 1 Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the towing vehicle 2 Shift the transmission to P Park and turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 3 Set the parking brake 4 To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed remove the following fuse from the instrument panel fuse block IGN SENSOR See nstrument Panel Fuse Block on page 6 116 for more information 5 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY 6 Shift the transmission to N Neutral 7 Release the parking brake Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once the destination has been reached Notice If 105 km h 65 mph is exceeded while towing the vehicle it could be damaged Never exceed 105 km h 65 mph while towing the vehicle Dinghy Towing From the Rear Notice Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it Also repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never have the vehicle towed from the rear Do not dinghy tow the vehicle fr
63. can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like potholes or sharp edged objects or when sliding into a curb The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and when possible avoid contact with curbs potholes and other road hazards Winter Tires If your vehicle has P225 50R18 size tires they are classified as low profile performance tires These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads often you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle The low profile performance tires may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads Winter tires in general are designed for increased traction on snow and ice covered roads With winter tires there may be decreased dry road traction increased road noise and shorter tire tread life After switching to winter tires be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking See your retailer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection Also see Buying New Tires on page 6 75 6 57 If you choose to use winter tires Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all Mise 1109 MS four wheel positions ae q0 60016 975 Use only radial ply tires of the same size load Q OST range and speed rating as your original equipment amp S tires
64. desired setting is displayed on the DIC UNLOCK HORN This feature which allows the vehicle s horn to chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can be enabled or disabled When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings OFF default The horn will not chirp when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed ON The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 49 LIGHT FLASH This feature which allows the vehicle s exterior hazard turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock unlock or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter are pressed can be enabled or disabled When LIGHT FLASH appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings OFF The exterior hazard turn signal lighting will not flash when the lock unlock or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed ON default The exterior hazard turn signal lighting will flash when the lock unlock or trunk release buttons on the RKE transmitter are presse
65. distance you may not see the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 29 The passenger sensing system turns off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags and the roof rail airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag should be enabled may inflate or not 2 67 According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front
66. draining of the battery To reactivate the interior lamps do one of the following Open any door Press any Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button Press the power door lock switch e Press the remote trunk release Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then to on again Accessory Power Outlet s Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio There are two accessory power outlets located on the center console below the climate controls If the vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS one accessory power outlet is in the center storage console and the other is on the center console below the climate controls To use an outlet remove the protective cap When not in use always cover the outlet with the protective cap The accessory power outlet is operational at all times Notice If electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet the battery may drain causing the vehicle not to start or damage to the battery This would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle Certain electrical accessories are not compatible with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power outlet Notice Adding any electrical equipment to
67. during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear Safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If I am a good driver and never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an excellent driver but if you are ina crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 2 36 or Infants and Young Children on page 2 39 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very impor
68. dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection 6 113 At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 6 114 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN w SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eigh
69. for additional information 6 77 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards 6 78 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however
70. hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the V6 engine add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 6 22 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for the location of the engine oil fill cap Fi AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range Push the dipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER e GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil ide
71. hold K SEEK for four seconds until a double beep sounds The radio goes to a stored preset plays for a few seconds then goes to the next stored preset Press K1 SEEK again to stop scanning preset stations Dbl SEEK Press to seek or scan stations with a strong signal in the selected band To seek stations press and release gt SEEK to go to the next station and stay there To scan stations press and hold Pl SEEK for a few seconds until the radio beeps once The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press gt I SEEK again to stop scanning To scan preset stations in the selected band press and hold SEEK for four seconds until a double beep sounds The radio goes to a stored preset plays for a few seconds then goes to the next stored preset Press gt I SEEK again to stop scanning preset stations 4 56 i Information For vehicles with XM MP3 WMA or RDS features press i to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 WMA song Song title information will be displayed on the top line of the display while the artist information will be displayed on the bottom line if the information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback When information is not available No Info displays Storing a Radio Station Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites while the vehicle is in P Park Tune to
72. information is available for the current song being played Auto Text will automatically page scroll the information every three seconds above the FAV presets on the radio display To activate Auto Text 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the softkey under AUTO TXT tab on the radio display 3 Press the softkey under the ON tab on the radio display If Lis pressed and the song title or artist information is longer than what can be displayed the extra information will page every three seconds when Auto Text is activated Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble The radio may display some or all tones such as BASS MID and TREB To adjust the tone settings 1 Press dd until the tone control tabs display 2 Press the softkey below the desired tab then turn J to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow or by pressing FWD or lt lt REV 4 57 The radio may be capable of adjusting bass midrange or treble to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BASS MID or TREB tab for more than two seconds The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing Jd for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once If a station s frequency is weak or has static de
73. is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes but unless the vehicle has antilock brakes not enough to lock the wheels See Braking on page 5 3 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But
74. measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords t
75. method A WARNING If the vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 55 km h 35 mph as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 6 81 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 23 Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options Two labels on the vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the
76. must be fully closed and the close the retractable hardtop and do not shut off trunk must be closed before raising the hardtop the ignition during the opening or closing of the 3 Make sure nothing or no one is on or around the retractable hardtop hardtop Make sure there is no cargo on top of or in front of the trunk cargo cover 3 41 4 The hardtop switch is located on the headliner To raise the hardtop pull and hold the switch until the cycle is complete 3 42 As the switch is being pulled the hardtop will raise from the trunk and move into place The hardtop and trunk lid will close and latch If the engine is on a chime will sound when the hardtop has raised completely The Driver Information Center DIC will display the TOP MOVE COMPLT message to signal the procedure is complete See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information After the hardtop has raised completely release the switch If you continue to pull the switch for about two seconds after the hardtop has raised completely the windows will automatically close If the switch is released before the hardtop cycle is complete the cycle stops and the Driver Information Center DIC displays the TOP NOT SECURE message Always pull and hold the switch until a chime sounds if the engine is on and the Driver Information Center DIC displays the TOP MOVE COMPLT to signal the procedure is complete See DIC Warnings and Messages on
77. nuiis masina 3 20 Retained Accessory Power RAP 006 3 21 Starting the Engine ceeeeeeeeeeeee teeter eens 3 21 Engine Coolant Heater cceeeeeeneee eee ees 3 23 Automatic Transmission Operation 6 3 24 Parking Brake wicesicecdictsecetsersarsicarseanentyenanenss 3 29 Shifting Into Park Automatic Transmission 3 30 Shifting Out of Park 2 00 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeee teeter eens 3 31 Parking Over Things That Burn 0eee 3 32 Engine Exhaust 5223 ars bores ele Mk bene 3 32 Running the Vehicle While Parked 3 33 MINT OPS 22022303 nevctiestes ites Rigen ates 3 34 Manual Rearview Mirror ccecce 3 34 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 3 34 COMPASS oscars teense ser E E 3 35 Outside Power Mirrors eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36 Outside Convex Mirror cceeeeeeeeeee ersten es 3 36 Storage Areas ce eects 3 37 Glove BOX icsenc ietedenie esti aw died ites 3 37 CupholderS Bsc aar dat ave de anea a reai araa Var 3 37 Center Console Storage ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 37 Convenience Net messies nicissitaia 3 37 OUNMOOR socera nnna aaa o E S 3 37 Retractable Hardtop 0 ee 3 38 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop 3 38 Raising the Retractable Hardtop 0 4 3 41 3 1 Keys A WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many re
78. occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 29 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the ve
79. of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts starting a fire Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving When outside temperatures are above 32 C 90 F At high speed for quite a while In heavy traffic especially in hot weather While pulling a trailer To get the right reading the fluid should be at normal operating temperature which is 82 C to 93 C 180 F to 200 F Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km 15 miles when outside temperatures are above 10 C 50 F If it is colder than 10 C 50 F you may have to drive longer Checking the Fluid Level Prepare the vehicle as follows 1 Park the vehicle on a level place Keep the engine running 2 With the parking brake applied place the shift lever in P Park 3 With your foot on the brake pedal move the shift lever through each gear pausing for about three seconds in each one Then position the shift lever in P Park 4 Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes Then without shutting off the engine follow these steps 1 The transmission fluid dipstick handle has this symbol on it and is located near the rear of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 fo
80. on aluminum wheels Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
81. on page 6 56 Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 40 TOP INOP inoperative TRUNK If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays if the trunk lid is not completely closed when operating the retractable hardtop Make sure that the trunk lid is closed when operating the retractable hardtop See Trunk on page 3 11 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information TOP MOVE COMPLT Complete If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays when the retractable hardtop has lowered or raised completely See Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information 4 46 TOP NOT ALLOWED If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays if the retractable hardtop button is pressed while the vehicle is not in P Park Make sure that the vehicle is in P Park when operating the retractable hardtop See Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information TOP NOT SECURE If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays when the retractable hardtop button is released before the top open or close operation is complete Press and hold the retractable har
82. panel on the driver side of the vehicle aa R One 33354543 3 SES PIII acta RR RR 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the secondary hood release lever to the right 3 Lift the hood release the hood prop rod from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood marked with an arrow Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then let the hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview When the hood on the 2 4 L L4 engine is opened on LAWEN ur Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Engine Cooling Fan See Cooling System on page 6 30 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine Oil Dipstick Out of View See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine Coolant Surge Tank See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 See Qn Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 6 30 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 6 39 Battery on page 6 42 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6 119
83. passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position WARNING Continued 2 68 WARNING Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag if equipped no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag s are off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag s are off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is
84. press and hold any of the DIC buttons If the condition is still present the warning message comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and back on With most messages a warning chime sounds when the message displays Your vehicle may have other warning messages AUTO Automatic LIGHTS OFF This message displays if the automatic headlamp system is disabled with the headlamp switch AUTO Automatic LIGHTS ON This message displays if the automatic headlamp system is enabled with the headlamp switch BRAKE FLUID This message displays while the ignition is on when the brake fluid level is low The brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 30 for more information Have the brake system serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible 4 42 CHANGE OIL SOON This message displays when the life of the engine oil has expired and it should be changed When this message is acknowledged and cleared from the display the engine oil life system must still be reset separately See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 24 Engine Oil on page 6 21 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information CHECK CARGO TOP If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays if the cargo cover is not in place when operating the retractable hardtop Open the trunk and make sure the cargo cover is secure and no objects are in contact with
85. psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 6 106 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 6 65 High Speed Operation A WARNING Driving at high speeds 160 km h 100 mph or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflatio
86. road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more If the vehicle has the Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 it improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions When driving through deep snow turn off the traction control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 5 4 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface o
87. safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people or can be thrown out of the vehicle A WARNING Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib infant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force on a person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint 2 39 A WARNING Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it
88. safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes Because the vehicle has antilock brakes do not try to tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all Does your trailer have its own brakes Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install adjust and maintain them properly Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any
89. service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required 8 10 Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttl
90. tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using lt phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers 4 78 Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press and begin speaking to answer the call e Press CW V to ignore a call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press again to return to the original call To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call with no action Press D V to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Blu
91. the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS remember It helps avoid only the braking skid If the vehicle does not have ABS then in a braking skid where the wheels are no longer rolling release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again This restores steering control Push the brake pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly As long as the wheels are rolling you will have steering control Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive e Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more
92. the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel Cluster BRAKE TRIP B 423 0 MI United States Uplevel Version Shown Canada similar 4 25 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada When in manual shift mode the odometer will change from the vehicle s mileage to the letter M for manual mode and a number indicating the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward For more information see Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3 24 This vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer Repair or replacement of the instrument panel cluster should only be performed by your dealer retailer Trip Odometer The trip odometer can display how far the vehicle has been driven since it was last reset For more information see DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 40 4 26 Tachometer The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm 2 4L and 3 6L Engine shown 3 5L and 3 9L Engine similar Notice If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the shaded warning area the vehicle could be damaged and the damages would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do no
93. the selector switch located below the four way control pad to the left or right to choose either the driver side or passenger side mirror 2 Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction 3 Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror 3 36 Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position Outside Convex Mirror A WARNING A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat Storage Areas Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it Cupholders There are two cupholders in the front center console of the vehicle and two in the rear of the center console Pull down the door on the rear of the center console to use the rear seat cupholders Center Console Storage The center console has a separate storage area Pull up the release handle on the fron
94. the transmission You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P Park This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park properly before you leave the driver seat To find out how see Shifting Into Park previously in the section When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of P Park before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission so you can pull the shift lever out of P Park Shifting Out of Park The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 6 43 for more information To shift out of P Park 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you s
95. the wiper blades before using them If frozen to the windshield carefully loosen or thaw them Damaged wiper blades should be replaced Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools If the motor gets stuck turn the wipers off clear away the snow or ice and then turn the wipers back on As an added safety feature if the wipers are on for more than 15 seconds the vehicle s headlamps turn on automatically They turn off 15 seconds after the wipers are turned off Windshield Washer Press the button at the end of the windshield wiper lever until the washers begin Z WARNING In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision When the button is released the washers stop but the wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume the previous speed Cruise Control If your vehicle has cruise control a speed of about 40 km h 25 mph or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40 km h 25 mph A WARNING Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire tr
96. tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or sensors replace them only with new GM original odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the vehicle ground clearance and ti
97. to be sure it is secure 2 53 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 46 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 46 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say 2 54 If you need to install more than one child restraint in the rear seat be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 44 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the l
98. to the main menu If the name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial Digit Dial Call e Re dial Using the Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Dial using lt phone name gt Number please followed by a tone 3 Say the entire number without pausing e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Diali
99. top or bottom of 3 Slide the seat forward A i 3 the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat 4 Move the seat rearward until it locks into place after the passenger enters the rear seat area 5 Move the seatback to its original position and return the front seat safety belt to the safety belt guide Make sure both the seat and seatback are locked Rear Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat Sedan and Coupe Folding the Seatback To fold down the rear seatback EN G U 1 The handles that are used to lower the rear seatbacks are located on the upper edge of the trunk opening Open the trunk Pull the driver s side handle to open the larger side of the seatback Pull the passenger s side handle to open the smaller side of the seatback Notice Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 2 Fold the seatback down from inside the vehicle A WARNING If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked A WARNING A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously inju
100. will go Q What are the different types of add on child restraints A Add on child restraints which are purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used 2 40 For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs A WARNING To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant ina rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints A WARNING A young child s hip bone
101. you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 2 63 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 2 59 A WARNING Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat mounted side impact airbags and or roof rail airbags 2 60 A WARNING Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder b
102. you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm 3 to 5 inches about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane e Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say abo
103. 13 TINO Siorra a E a E E 6 113 Underbody Maintenance ccccccceceeeeee 6 113 Washing Your Vehicle W W sssseseeeeeeeeerers rese 6 110 Weathers ips lt i cvesaccrarveendizenmenidenivedsbacanens 6 110 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 6 112 Arming the System aseeseen 3 16 Assistance Program Roadside 600 8 7 AUdiO SYSTEMS aars eee eeeeeeeeeaeeneeae ed 4 53 4 72 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ccceeeceeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaes 4 82 Radio Reception 2 eceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 83 Setting the ClOCK cceceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 4 53 Theft Deterrent Feature ceceeeeeeeeeeeee 4 81 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 4 84 Audio System S sarren rarere 4 54 Automatic Climate Control System 06 4 20 Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation 4 3 34 Automatic Door LOCK ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 9 Automatic Headlamp System 4 12 Automatic Transmission PUIG eea ERE E a anes ee 6 27 6 28 Operation ihein raa seen eh REKID Ebh anes 3 24 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check ssssseeeeeerere renere kernen n en nnne 7 8 Backglass Antenna eceeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 84 Backing Up sci asessctamnnaiev aeaa r aa 5 31 Battery zoso era e A ESN 6 42 Electric Power Management sssserereee 4 14 Run Down Protection c eeeeeeeeee
104. 2010 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M Ini Br eeen 1 1 Storage Areas GG sssseeeeeeeeeeerer renerne rr nnnn 3 37 Instrument Panel ange bandens ds 1 2 SUMIOOE gn becesdvencccturenecsntden deter A 3 37 Initial Drive Information ec eeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 1 4 Retractable Hardtop oo 3 38 Vehicle Features OOE 1 14 Instrument Panel ccccccccccccccccccccccccecececeeeee 4 1 Performance and Maintenance 1 18 Instrument Panel Overview ss 4 3 Seats and Restraint System 2 1 Climate Controls secencssiinweacrcesteenncsdmaonnetes 4 16 Head AestraintS css kanslere be ees 2 2 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 4 24 Front Seats sxiscolcocwe neds oid tans inao iE 2 4 Driver Information Center DIC oo 4 39 Rear Seats oo iecccceecccseccceeececeeeeeeneeeeneees 2 13 Audio System S eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 53 Safety Belts A E ES TE 2 14 Driving Your Vehicle secs 5 1 Child Restraints oo ceccceccc ceca eeeaeeeueeenees 2 36 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 5 2 Airbag System cevsissatesneissvecnssceeecenseneeeeess 2 59 Towing iecceskctccetl an acseitine ener treer reen reen 5 23 Restraint System Check M W ssssssssseeerenrreer 2 74 service and Appearance Care 6 1 Features and Controls 00c ecteeeereees 3 1 Service vcanasciaiesaeonteentdsteadeiuterectides 6 4 KEYS oeseeeseeseeseseeeeeseesete
105. 6 Engine and 3 9L V6 Engine 3 6L V6 Engine 7 13 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided Retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Odometer 3 Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance Record cont d Odometer R i Section 8 Customer Assistance and Information 8 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 8 2 Online Owner Center c eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone FI Users cies ainar talon ine bteace Haar rens 8 6 Customer Assistance Offices sssseeererereee 8 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 8 7 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeee ees 8 7 Scheduling Service Appointments 0 8 10 Courtesy Transportation Program 0 00 8 10 Collision Damage Repair eceeeeeeneeeeenes 8 11 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects 0e 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States GOVErNMENT sinansa enia ger ber barre kea 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian GOVEMMENE veccievevesesiescorssevescdetee coven aari 8 15 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors 0cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Vehicle Data
106. AM comes canteens attends eee 5 10 Spare Tire COMPAGC arre EES 6 106 INStalliNG ceanii a a SS ERE SDS DERES 6 93 REMOVING csitcnecis tinin onneen Ya ior Eoi 6 91 SIONN saa lies lenker de DE Ehe Ahern ne 6 99 Specifications and Capacities eeeeeee 6 125 Speedometer 02 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 26 Split Bench Seat 60 40 0 2 0 ee eeeeeeee eee eee eee 2 13 StabiliTrak Control Indicator Light Electronic 4 32 Start Vehicle Remote c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 Starter Switch Check ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 7 8 Starting the Engine W W ssesevereeerre renere ener 3 21 Starting the Vehicle ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea een ees 1 4 SLE CTING aanere agea dt aE EE ntaneimcapnacaamnetes 5 8 Steering in Emergencies c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 8 Steering TIDS vicieveceseeiveeete is EE ENEE EE 5 8 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 0006 4 82 Steering Wheel Tilt and Telescopic 005 4 3 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 5 19 Storage Areas Center Console esciti risa riene 3 37 Convenience Net cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 37 Gupholders vss 5 ASE he eu EIDE SEE ROERE 3 37 Glove BOX raoe e e eana a GEES 3 37 Storing a Favorite Station cceeeeeeeeeeeee eee 1 14 Storing a Flat Tire and Tools All Models Except GXP and Retractable Hardtop 6 99 Storin
107. C on page 5 5 Tire Pressure Monitor The Tire Pressure Monitor alerts you when a significant reduction in pressure occurs in one or more of the vehicle s tires by illuminating the low tire pressure warning light on the instrument cluster The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected The proper tire pressures for your vehicle are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label located on the driver side center pillar B pillar See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you drive This may be an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure Note The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire pressure but it does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance It is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 66 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 67 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit The kit can be used to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 82 for complete operating information Engine Oil Life System The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life ba
108. Child Restraint 6 2 44 Why Safety Belts Work ceeeeeeeeneeeeeneeee es 2 16 18 Window Indexing Coupe and Retractable Hardtop reemer 3 15 Window Lockout Sedan Only u u dc dcsseererereee 3 16 WIRKOWS ie ssncces aen nen house meer Debes bs 3 13 POWER vcacacdscesetenteacmcndetsaadandeteawenad iana 3 14 Windshield Washo ere a a E Rania 4 6 Washer FIUIG remainn re nd eng 6 38 Wiper Blade Replacement ee 6 55 Wiper Blades Cleaning 0 eseeeeeeeeeees 6 112 Wiper FUSES 2 eesictscnsuieiiiniwcekeiiveoen ieee 6 115 WIPES itis ccnti nectar e n N 4 5 Winter Divine ad eenen aena 5 15 Winter Tires 2555 ole Feber aitei annoia annia 6 57 XM Radio Messages cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 4 70 XM Satellite Radio Service ceeeeeeeeeee eee 4 59 XM Satellite Radio Antenna sciondara in iaai itv E ensues 4 84 XM Satellite Radio Service u dsseererereee 4 83 Your Responsibility cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 1 24
109. Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanation Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying fo
110. Cruise Conor enssins 4 7 Instrument Panel Cluster ss 4 25 Headlamps 32453 noeros ecicaciteciev ie iidecslees 4 10 Speedometer and Odometer 1 4 26 Headlamps on Reminder c ccceeseseeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Trip Odometer saii nn neira nnna oaia dees 4 26 Headlamps Off in Park scene 4 11 Tachometer Fete REELLE REE ERE LEE RE REE KER E LER K ERE EERREE 4 26 Delayed Headlamps u u dsdsseseeeeeeerrrrerrrrennrr 4 11 Safety Belt Reminders 2 4 27 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 4 11 Airbag Readiness Light sone TERE LESTER FEER EEEEEEE 4 28 Automatic Headlamp System 2 4 12 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 4 29 Fog LANDS eenid cteascatnieassaaniedsasmnccessanieass 4 12 Charging System Light secs 4 30 Instrument Panel Brightness 000000eeee 4 13 Brake System Warning Light D E 4 30 Courtesy Lamps zone ore rare 4 13 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 4 31 Dome Lamps cccceccesesceseesesseseesesceseesercerees 4 13 Traction OM MGM 42 eesin amann aina Reb ANDEN 4 32 Entry Exit Lighting sccssesseesseeeesteeeeteeeees 4 13 Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light 4 32 Parade Dimming 0cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeenenes 4 14 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 4 33 Reading LAMPS ornare doses ennea 4 14 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 4 33 Section 4 Tire Pressure LIQ se uhewicttnnndieesiencemeateneshaatit
111. D R or CD RW disc capability feature For more information see Using an MP3 on page 4 63 later in this section CD Messages CHECK DISC If an error message displays and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons The CD player is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again A problem may have occurred while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem Care of CDs Store CD s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom of the disc If the bottom of a CD is damaged it may not play properly or at all Do not touch the bottom of a CD while handling it Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is dirty take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make
112. FM or XM stations See Radio s on page 4 54 Setting the Clock To set the time and date for the Radio with CD MP3 and USB port or the Radio with CD MP3 player 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN 2 Press D to turn the radio on 3 Press and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 4 Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs that you want to change 5 Increase or decrease the time or date by turning JI clockwise or counterclockwise For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your specific audio system see Setting the Clock on page 4 53 Satellite Radio XM is a Satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound A fee is required to receive the XM service For more information refer to e www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 U S e www xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 Canada See XM Satellite Radio Service under Radio s on page 4 54 and XM Radio Messages on page 4 70 Portable Audio Devices This vehicle may have an auxiliary input located on the audio faceplate External devices such as iPods laptop computers MP3 players CD changers USB storage devices etc can be connected to the auxiliary port using a 3 5 mm 1 8 in input jack or the USB port depen
113. Have the system serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible SVC Service TIRE MONITOR On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 33 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 67 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer TIRE LEARN ON On vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry RKE system this message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 66 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 for more information 4 45 TIRE LOW ADD AIR On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires is low on air The low tire pressure warning light also comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 33 If this message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires
114. If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer The light should go out once the engine starts If it stays on or comes on while driving there could be a problem with the charging system This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt or that there is an electrical problem Have it checked right away If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on turn off accessories such as the radio and air conditioner 4 30 Brake System Warning Light The vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop the vehicle For good braking both parts need to be working If the warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have the brake system inspected right away BRAKE q United States Canada This light should come on briefly when the engine is started If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem When the ignition is on the brake system warning light also comes on when the parking brake is set The light will stay on if the parking brake does not fully release If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released it means there is a brake problem Z WARNING The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is st
115. If the security light flashes wait until the light stops flashing Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service 6 46 Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part B Good Battery C Dead Battery To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it i
116. OFF only the engine running and the transmission in when the shift lever is in P Park N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the The ignition key should come out only in regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held LOCK OFF by the parking brake only Contact your dealer retailer if service is required e To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability i With the engine running shift to P Park Then Parking Brake and Automatic release the parking brake followed by the regular Transmission P Park Mechanism brake Check Contact your dealer retailer if service is required A WARNING When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Recommended Fluids and Usage __Fluid Lubricant Lubricants Sele een GM Power Steering Fluid l ee S 9 GM Part No U S 89021184 Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part ystem in Canada 89021186 if equipped Automatic DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Transmission Fluid Usage __Fiuietubricant Muli Purpose Lubricant Superlubs Fluid lubricant Key Lock GM Part No U S 12346241 Engine oil which meets GM Cylinders S Canada 16955474 Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Hood Latch
117. On Light eeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneees 4 38 High Speed Operation Tires ceeeeeeeeeee eee 6 66 Highway Hypnosis 25255 ciiccicsccness sa iiini ienna canes 5 13 Hill and Mountain Roads c 5 14 ARCHES ciiai a ean ODE 5 30 Hood Checking Things Under s es 6 14 Release einige ae ain a aieiai 6 15 PONM korenaren aser e a ERER How OnStar Service Works 0 ceceeeeeeee eee How the System Alarm is Activated How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge TANK minoren tirent riiet ee i Ee How to Check 22215 Eder nis How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check Power Steering Fluid How to Detect a Tamper Condition 5 How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System How to Turn Off the System Alarm 00 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Hydraulic Power Steering cceeeeeeeneeeeee eee Hydroplaning s ccsssecetenecesichs aa eighteen beboere If a Crash OCCUIS ss pice rs RE Yoneda sien RA aa If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment 2 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenes If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment 2 00 0 cceceee eee eee eeeeeneeeeeneeeeenee If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult Size Occupant If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint Ignition Positions Ignition Transmission Lock
118. Park position To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System turn the switch to off on To turn them off turn the switch to off on again This is a momentary control switch that springs back when released The Automatic Headlamp System always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle Headlamps on Reminder A reminder tone sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on if the driver s door is open and the ignition is in the LOCK OFF or ACC ACCESSORY position To turn the tone off turn the knob all the way counterclockwise In the automatic mode the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in the LOCK OFF position Headlamps Off in Park This feature works when the ignition is in the ON RUN position and it is dark outside To turn the headlamps off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights on turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp position To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps when it is dark outside turn the exterior lamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position This function does not work for vehicles first sold in Canada Delayed Headlamps The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK OFF then the headlamps automatically turn off To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature while it is active turn the turn signal multifunction lever up one position and then back to AUTO Daytime Running L
119. Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones lf another phone is found the response will be lt Phone name gt is now connected If another phone is not found the original phone remains connected 4 74 Storing Name Tags The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems The system uses the following commands to store and retrieve phone numbers Store Digit Store Directory Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Store The system responds with Store number please followed by a tone 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses Ifthe system recognizes the number it responds with OK Storing and repeats the phone number Ifthe system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the number followed by Please say yes or no If the number is correct say Yes If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for th
120. RE 14 Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint 2 43 Security Eight PRS SENSE SETE eanan SEENDE RE nere a a 4 37 SENGE dix ar re E T 6 4 Accessories and Modifications 6 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the VER IE ler Fo Fa caddie Sion ann ees S 6 6 Doing Your Own Work ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 6 5 Engine Soon Lamp ceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeee 4 34 Parts Identification Label e 6 115 Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Scheduling Appointments e eeeeeeeeee ee 8 10 Service Bulletins ccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 Service Manuals ceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance 8 9 Services Provided 22 06is lt cscvste0sceavecssssevenescateeeoss 8 8 Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles est sete dbdes cai Mee dusion a eA we tances 8 9 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 2 72 Setting the Clock ccceceeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 15 4 53 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble 4 57 Sheet Metal Damage ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeees 6 113 Shifting Out OF Park ac eticidsae di hicete oinn eu adsatcnacace ces 3 31 Shifting Into Park ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 30 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Sedan Only 2 31 Signals Turn and Lane Change 0eeeeeeeees 4 4 SKA
121. Recording and Privacy 8 16 Event Data Recorders 2 c c eceeeeeeeeeees 8 17 ONSTAR aee a r aA AERE 8 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID ssrisiiisnienssiso dessins ius 8 18 Radio Frequency Statement ss 8 18 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 762 2737 In Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the fol
122. SC feature the transmission will have firmer shifting and sportier performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute RPM The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is too high The transmission will not allow shifting to the next lower gear if the vehicle speed or engine RPM is too high 3 28 2 Second 3 Third Gear Start Feature Notice If you attempt a third gear start while trailering or towing a heavy load you will notice reduced engine power This could overheat and damage your transmission Do not attempt a third gear start while trailering or towing your vehicle Vehicles with a 6 speed transmission allow 2 Second and 3 Third gear starts When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may want to shift into 2 Second or 3 Third gear A higher gear and light application of the gas pedal may allow you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces With the MSM the vehicle can accelerate from a stop in 2 Second or 3 Third 1 Move the shift lever from D Drive into the M Manual Mode position 2 With the vehicle stopped move the lever forward towards the plus to select 2 Second o
123. See Cooling System on page 6 30 Engine Coolant Surge Tank See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 Pressure Cap See Cooling System on page 6 30 Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 6 39 Automatic Transmission Fluid Cap Dipstick Out of View See Checking the Fluid Level under Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines on page 6 27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine on page 6 28 Battery on page 6 42 Underhood Fuse Block See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6 119 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 6 21 When to Add Engine Oil V6 Engine If the oil is below the MIN mark for the L4 engine or below the cross
124. The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time e When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance Roadside Assistance Program U S 1 800 ROADSIDE 762 3743 TTY Users 1 888 889 2438 Canada 1 800 268 6800 As the owner of a new Pontiac you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program This program provides technically trained advisors who are available 24 hours a day 365 days a year minor repair information or towing arrangements Roadside Assistance and OnStar If you have a current OnStar subscription press the OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem contact Roadside Assistance and relay exact location to get you the help you need Ponti
125. The following procedures explain the proper operation of the retractable hardtop The retractable hardtop will not operate if the trunk cargo cover is not in place If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raised multiple times the engine should be running while doing so to prevent drain on the vehicle s battery Lowering the Retractable Hardtop Notice Leaving the retractable hardtop down and exposing the interior of the vehicle to outdoor conditions may cause damage Always close the retractable hardtop if leaving the vehicle outdoors Notice Lowering the top if it is damp wet or dirty can cause stains mildew and damage to the inside of your vehicle Dry off the top before lowering it 3 38 Notice If you lower the retractable hardtop in cold weather 32 F 0 C or lower you may damage top components Do not lower the retractable hardtop in cold weather 1 Park on a level surface and shift the transmission into P Park The vehicle must be in P Park and the engine must be running or the ignition turned to the ON RUN position to operate the retractable hardtop 2 The trunk cargo cover must be fully closed and the trunk must be closed before lowering the hardtop 3 There should be nothing on top in front of or around the hardtop or cargo cover Z WARNING When the retractable hardtop is opened or closed people can be injured by the parts that move the hardtop and its mechanism the trunk
126. This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6 58 for additional information 6 75 GM
127. Tire and Loading Information label and the Vehicle Certification label Z WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed hx koe kg or A Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar With the driver door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The Tire and Loading Information label lists the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds KKK KM KKK K KK KKK KOK The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6 56 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 There is also important loading information on the Certification label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle
128. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the pee tele Sl ryan Taillamp 3157K bulb straight out of the socket T T 7 4 Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install Renecable Hardtop nly 5 Replace the license plate lamp by pushing it Sedan Only through the fascia opening 6 Turn the two screws that hold the license plate lamp clockwise to reinstall For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer 6 54 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information on wiper blade inspection Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways Here is how to remove the wiper blade 1 Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield 2 Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector 3 Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position For the proper type and size see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 11 6 55 Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer A WARNING
129. Y This position unlocks the transmission It also lets you use things like the radio and windshield wipers while the engine is not running To use ACC ACCESSORY turn the key clockwise to the first position Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5 23 ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel warning lights The ignition switch will stay in this position while the engine is running The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time Q START This position starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch will return to the ON RUN position for normal driving A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened the ignition is in ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF and the key is in the ignition Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off Audio System Power Windows Heated Seats if equipped e Sunroof if equipped These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF The power windows heated seats and sunroof will work until any door is opened The radio continues to work until the
130. able hardtop stowed inside See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Emergency Trunk Release Handle Notice Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk as it could damage the handle The emergency trunk release handle is only intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk enabling them to open the trunk from the inside There is a glow in the dark emergency trunk release handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch This handle will glow following exposure to light Pull the release handle up to open the trunk from the inside Windows A WARNING Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather 3 13 Power Windows A WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children Sedan Shown Coupe Similar When t
131. ac Owner Center The Pontiac Owner Center is a complimentary service that includes online service reminders vehicle maintenance tips online owner manual special privileges and more Sign up today at www gmownercenter com pontiac U S or www gm ca Canada 1 21 OnStar OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security navigation diagnostics and calling services Automatic Crash Response In a crash built in sensors can automatically alert an OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the vehicle to see if you need help 1 22 How OnStar Service Works OD This blue button connects you to a specially trained OnStar advisor to verify your account information and to answer questions Push this red emergency button to get priority help from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors Push this button for hands free voice activated calling and to give voice commands for turn by turn navigation Crisis Assist Stolen Vehicle Assistance Vehicle Diagnostics Remote Door Unlock Roadside Assistance Turn by Turn Navigation and Hands Free Calling are available on most vehicles Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles For more information see the OnStar Owner s Guide or visit www onstar com U S or www onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press to speak with an O
132. ack if more than ten seconds have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through the tracks on the CD 4 60 Dl SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track displays Release to resume playing the track bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track displays Release to resume playing the track RDM Random Tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To use random 1 Press the softkey below RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays 2 Press the softkey again to turn off random play BAND Press to listen to the radio while a CD is playing The CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD while listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing the track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device Found may display Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The radio may have the MP3 C
133. acking location 6 Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire being changed A WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A WARNING Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift ground so there is enough room for the compact head into the proper location before raising the spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well vehicle 6 95 8 Remove all of the wheel nuts 10 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 9 Remove the flat tire A WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 90 6 96 11 Install the compact spare tire 12 Put the wheel nuts back on with the r
134. action can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control A WARNING If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control The cruise control buttons are located on the steering wheel On Off Press this button to turn the cruise control system on and off RES Resume Press this button to resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed SET Set Press this button to set a speed and to decrease the speed To set a speed do the following 1 Press the on off symbol to turn cruise control on The indicator light on the button comes on 2 Get to the speed you want 3 Press the SET symbol and release it The cruise symbol displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the system is engaged 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal When the brakes are applied the cruise control shuts off If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control System TCS or Enhanced Traction System ETS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control automatically disengages See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 When road conditions allow the cruise control can be used again Resuming a Set Speed Suppose the cruis
135. add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 6 35 6 31 What to Use A WARNING Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture e Gives freezing protection down to 37 C 34 F outside temperature Gives boiling protection up to 129 C 265 F engine temperature Protects against rust and corrosion Will not damage aluminum parts Helps keep the proper engine temperature 6 32 Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice If extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixture o
136. aded end of the bolt passes through the center hole of the wheel Remove the yellow cap Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut Replace the cover A B C g Cover E Bolt Extension Retainer F Jack and Wheel Flat Tire Valve Wrench Stem Up G Bolt Nut The compact spare tire is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can See Compact Spare Tire on page 6 106 6 103 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools All Models Except Retractable Hardtop A WARNING J Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 2 Collapse the wrench using the same button used to extend it 3 Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the side of the jack 6 104 4 Raise the jack to the height shown and lock the wrench onto the jack 5 Place the jack in the spare tire well Make sure the stow bolt goes through the hole in the center of the wrench on the jack with the base of the jack towards the front of the vehicle Turn the jack retainer nut until it firmly contacts the wrench Do not over tighten 6 Place the compact spare into the tire compart
137. ailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1 000 miles 1600 km the new vehicle is driven The engine transmission or other parts could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads e Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on the vehicle s parts Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature is above 100 F 38 C 5 28 Three important considerations have to do with weight e the weight of the trailer the weight of the trailer tongue e and the total weight on the vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be It should never weigh more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue
138. alfunctions If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 2 59 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately 4 28 A WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message can also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has a passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 for important safety information The instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG Vi OFF ON 2 M 2 A United States Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system che
139. although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 F Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only 6 60 G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S IT HIT A Passenger P Meiric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width
140. amps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument panel that controls the DRL Do not cover this sensor or the head lamps will be on when they are not needed The DRL system makes the low beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamps control is in AUTO The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps only position This applies only to vehicles that are first sold in Canada The light sensor detects daytime light The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not in P Park When the DRL system is on the taillamps sidemarker lamps parking lamps and instrument panel lights are not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position The regular headlamp system should be turned on when they are needed Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps sidemarker parking lamps and the instrument panel lights The radio lights will also be dim The vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument panel that controls the automatic headlamp system Do not cover the sensor or the a
141. an cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listening to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off 4 83 Fixed
142. an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life It shows 100 when the system is reset after an oil change It alerts you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Engine Oil on page 6 21 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change See How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System under Engine Oil Life System on page 6 24 Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure is shown in either kilopascals kPa or pounds per square inch psi Press the information button until LF PSI kPa RF displays for the front tires Press the information button again until LR PSI kPa RR displays for the rear tires If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to add air will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information 4 41 DIC Warnings and Messages These messages appear if there is a problem detected in one of your vehicle s systems A message clears when the vehicle s condition is no longer present To acknowledge a message and clear it from the display
143. an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 66 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A WARNING If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 6 75 and Accessories and Modifications on page 6 4
144. anada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 762 2737 or write Pontiac Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 In Canada call 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE
145. and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The driver side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver side rear tire two additional horn chirps sound to indicate the tire learning process is done Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn mode or if communication with the receiver stops or if the time limit has expired turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF and start over beginning with Step 2 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles without Remote Keyless Entry RKE 1 2 3 Set the parking brake Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off Using the Driver Information Center DIC press the INFO and Set Reset buttons at the same time for about one second Then press and release the INFO button until the TIRE LEARN message displays Press and hold the Set Reset DIC button for approximately three seconds to start the TPMS learn mode The horn sounds twice to indicate the TPMS receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARN ON message displays The driver side front turn signal also comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Start with t
146. and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The
147. ap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt If your child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 46 for more information Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 2 55 To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it If your seat has a safety belt guide return the safety belt into the guide on the seatback by sliding the webbing through the opening on the guide Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position The veh
148. are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port Playing a CD R or CD RW MP3 J Tune Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently playing K SEEK Press to go to the start of the track if more than ten seconds have played Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks DI SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays Release REV to resume playing gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays Release FWD to resume playing The elapsed time of the file displays 4 65 lt Previous Folder Press the softkey below lt J to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the softkey below gt to go to the first track in the next folder RDM Random MP3 files can be listened to on a CD in random rather than sequential order To use random press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays to play songs from the current CD in random order Press the same softkey again to turn off random play Music Navigator Press the softkey below to have the files p
149. arnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information REMOTE START If your vehicle has remote start this feature allows remote start to be turned off or on Remote start allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When REMOTE START appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3 5 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC LOCK HORN This feature which allows the vehicle s horn to chirp every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed can be enabled or disabled When LOCK HORN appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings OFF default The horn will not chirp on the first press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter The horn will still chirp on the second press ON The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the
150. as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user in the U S can communicate with Pontiac by dialing 1 800 833 PONT 7668 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Pontiac the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Pontiac Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33172 Detroit MI 48232 5172 www Pontiac com 1 800 762 2737 or 1 800 833 7668 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 ROADSIDE 762 3743 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 8 6 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 C
151. asons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children The key can be used for the ignition and all locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in your vehicle Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of your vehicle contact Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right
152. assenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG Vi OFF ON 2 M SA United States Canada See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 for important information Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located A on the driver door OMO Q aD 1 Move the selector switch located below the four way control pad to the left or right to choose either the driver side or passenger side mirror 2 Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash To fold push the mirror toward the vehicle Push the mirror outward to return to its original position See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3 36 Interior Mirror Adjust the mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side To reduce headlamp glare during nighttime use move the lever at the bottom of the mirror to the right Move it to the left for daytime use See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3 34 Vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror will automatically reduce the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behi
153. atically turn on and off when the fog lamps are turned on and off The fog lamps turn off while the high beam headlamps are turned on Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Instrument Panel Brightness The knob with this symbol is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lights Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the interior lamps Courtesy Lamps If the vehicle has a retractable hardtop it has courtesy lamps in the rear passenger area of the vehicle These lamps make it easier to see while entering and exiting the vehicle These lamps come on when any door is opened and only turn off when all the doors are closed Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position In this position the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed Entry Exit Lighting The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door is opened These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is turned to ON RUN They also come on when the unlock symbol button or the horn symbol is presse
154. ation eee When It Is Time for New Tires 0 ee Buying New Tires cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeees Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 006 6 77 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ceeeeeeeeees 6 78 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 79 Wheel Replacement eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 79 Tire CHAINS s tsienesdeavteensavestsagseredeshdasdeeeasieeed 6 81 If a Tire Goes Flat cee eeeeeee eee eee eee eeee ees 6 81 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 005 6 82 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage 6 89 Changing a Flat Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 6 90 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 91 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare TS poii aienea tinai aaeain 6 93 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 99 Compact Spare Tire l a 6 106 Appearance Care l 6 107 Interior Cleaning ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeea eee een tenes 6 107 Fabric Carpet eiri nnne noaa 6 108 LENE secretis onm orni aiora ledelser 6 109 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUMACCS eniris ein eaea NESE tes 6 109 Care of Safety Belts 2 0 00 ceeceeeeeeee eee eee eres 6 110 WeatherstripS 0 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 6 110 Washing Your Vehicle seeeeeeeee eee eeee 6 110 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 00 6 111 Electrical
155. ation Press or depending on the vehicle press AUTO OFF to turn the compass on or off When the ignition and the compass feature are on the compass displays the current compass direction after a few seconds Compass Calibration If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction N for North for example there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna mount note pad holder or similar object If the letter C appears in the compass window the compass may need to be reset or calibrated The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 8 km 5 mph or less until the display reads a direction Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight If you do not live in zone eight or drive out of the area the compass variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone To adjust for compass variance 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map that follows 2 Press and hold the on off button until a zone number displays 3 Once the zone number displays press D repeatedly until you reach the correct zone number If C appears in the compass window the compass may need calibration See Compass Calibration listed previously 3 35 Outside Power Mirrors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located A on the driver door OMO Q aD To adjust the mirrors 1 Move
156. ation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Pontiac Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 25852252 B Second Printing Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en frangais aupr s du concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue frangaise www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2009 General Motors All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols Warning Messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death A WARNING These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Notice This means there is something that could result in property or v
157. ave the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 2 65 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A WARNING A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or whi
158. ay a number to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the number to send Ifthe system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say a name tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial lt name tag gt Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicle Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete thi
159. been used for that ignition cycle Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 for additional information Remote Start Ready If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer retailer to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature If the RKE transmitter has a plus symbol on the back cover your vehicle has the remote start ready feature See your dealer retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle Doors and Locks Door Locks A WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it WARNING Continued
160. ble for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9 1 m 80 ft Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in vehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones 4 71 Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
161. but the off indicator is lit it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 2 70 If this happens use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably extended 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped V
162. can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for the safety of the driver and the passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission axles wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements 5 27 Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with tr
163. ck If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance if equipped you may not see the system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal and seat mounted side impact airbags If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag are enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal and seat mounted side impact airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 28 for more information including important safety information 4 29 Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to start but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working
164. climbing hills to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute RPM The transmission will not shift to the next higher gear if the engine RPM is too low The transmission will not allow shifting to the next lower gear if the engine RPM is too high If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change or detects a problem with the transmission the range of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will come on See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 34 for more information Driver Shift Control DSC If Equipped To use this feature 1 Move the shift lever from DRIVE D rearward to MANUAL M While driving in manual mode the transmission will remain in the driver selected gear When coming to a stop in the manual position the vehicle will automatically shift into FIRST 1 gear 2 Press the plus paddle located on top of the steering wheel controls forward to upshift or push the backside of the shift paddle rearward to downshift 3 27 The odometer display on the instrument panel cluster will change from the vehicle s mileage to the letter M for Manual Shift Mode and a number indicating the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward See Speedometer and Odometer on page 4 26 for more information While using the D
165. crease the treble EQ Equalization Press this button to select preset equalization settings To return to the manual mode press EQ until Manual displays or start to manually adjust the bass midrange or treble by pressing dd Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade 1 Press dd until the speaker control labels display 2 Press the softkey under the desired tab or continue pressing J to highlight the desired tab 4 58 3 Turn dd to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow On some radios bb FWD and lt REV can also be used to adjust the highlighted level The radio may be capable of adjusting balance or fade to the middle position by pressing the softkey below the BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds The radio beeps once and the level adjusts to the middle position The radio may also be capable of adjusting all tone and speaker controls to the middle position by pressing Jd for more than two seconds until the radio beeps once Finding a Category CAT Station XM Satellite Radio Service Only CAT Category The radio may have the CAT button feature To select and find a desired category 1 Press BAND until the XM frequency displays 2 Press CAT to display the category labels on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays 3 Press either of the two softkeys below th
166. ction 1 In Brief Instrument Panel cc ceceeeeeeeererneree 1 2 Vehicle Features scenerne 1 14 Initial Drive Information c ccscccecesseseeseees 1 4 a E EAR SEE EEK oes Sales moe a RKE System Portable Audio Devices seere 1 15 Daa a A 15 Steering Wheel Controls setisiienit A eieciicee 1 16 esc pe seins ua ngs wren vee ee syne BIGION ceirnin inaen s iaaa O ee cage aa T EEN ig Cruise Control sessista iinei 1 17 Seat Adjustment coco cee eee rce eee 1 6 Power Outlets ee 1 17 Safety Belt ccssecsssscsssesessessssenensesssserseenes 1 9 Performance and Maintenance 1 18 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag 1 9 Traction Control System TCS s 1 18 Mirror Adjustment g cstancteusermossscneccatansnmnancets 1 10 Electronic Stability Control ESC 2 1 18 Steering Wheel Adjustment ss 1 11 Tire Pressure Monitor eee MR Se rs 1 19 Interior Lighting ccsccencccusemiasacatdeaine aistonsunandas 1 11 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 2 1 19 Exterior Lighting cccccccccssssssetseeesessseeees 1 12 Engine Oil Life System 0 0 1 20 Windshield Wiper Washer c scseeeeeeeeeees 1 12 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol senere 1 20 Climate Controls lt cscc 2 acaactacastoteaveciucnctae seneaite 1 13 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 2 1 21 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeee 1 21 SIS ET era eet oe ete a 1 22 1 1 Instrument Panel
167. cure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut Cover Wing Nut Extension Flat Tire valve stem up Nut Jack G Bolt The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can See Compact Spare Tire on page 6 106 Storing a Flat Tire and Tools GXP and Retractable Hardtop Models To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire compartment 1 Make sure the retractable hardtop is in the up position 2 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 3 If you have a retractable hardtop model unlatch the trunk cargo cover so that it is in the open position nmp 4 Remove the bolt extension in the yellow sleeve from the jack and remove the center cap from the wheel 6 101 7 Raise the jack to the height shown and lock the wrench onto the jack 5 Collapse the wrench using the same button used to extend it 6 Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the side of the jack 8 Place the jack over the bolt B on the floor making sure it contacts the bolt 6 102 11 12 13 14 Place the extension bolt A onto the bolt B Thread the jack retainer nut C until it is at or near the end of the threads While placing the flat tire in the wheel tub reach under the wheel and lift the extension bolt so the thre
168. d See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 50 DELAY LOCK This feature which delays the actual locking of the vehicle can be enabled or disabled When DELAY LOCK appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a second time OFF The doors will lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter See Power Door Locks on page 3 8 Delayed Locking on page 3 9 and Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC AUTO UNLK Unlock This feature which allows the vehicle to automatically unlock certain doors can be enabled or disabled When AUTO UNLK appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings ALL default All of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER The driver
169. d Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Storing a Flat Tire and Tools All Models Except GXP and Retractable Hardtop A WARNING Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire compartment 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 2 Remove the bolt extension in the yellow sleeve from the jack and remove the center cap from the wheel Collapse the wrench using the same button used to extend it Attach the wrench to the jack by placing the tab on the wrench into the hole on the side of the jack Then place the wrench handle over the tab on the side of the jack Raise the jack to the height shown and lock the wrench onto the jack 6 Place the jack over the bolt A on the floor making sure it contacts the bolt Thread the jack retainer nut until it contacts the jack 6 100 10 11 With the valve stem up place the tire on the compartment floor with the rear of the tire under the trim panel The tire may not lay completely flat Line up the bolt with the wheel center With the yellow cap in place to prevent the wheel from being scratched screw the bolt extension onto the bolt through the wheel center hole Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension Se
170. d Consult your dealer retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations How far will the vehicle be towed Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Does the vehicle have the proper towing equipment See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 5 13 Dinghy Towing From the Front If the vehicle has the 3 9L V6 engine with the four speed
171. d See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 A WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 90 6 74 When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used
172. d gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If the vehicle has the 3 6L V6 engine VIN Code 7 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher For best performance or trailer towing you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications Ata minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 6 8 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications
173. d and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 For the 2 4 L 3 5 L and 3 6 L engines the transmission fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the transmission is at operating temperature If the transmission fluid level must be checked take the vehicle to the dealer retailer 6 27 Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little difficult you may choose to have this done at the dealer retailer service department If you do it yourself be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick 6 28 Notice Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission Too much can mean that some
174. d on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE system transmitter The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about 20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to provide light as you exit Parade Dimming Parade mode automatically prohibits the dimming of the instrument panel displays during the daylight while the headlamps are on so that the displays are still able to be seen Reading Lamps For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps press the lens to turn the lamp on and off while the doors are closed These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened Trunk Lamp The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and turns off when the trunk is closed Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator al
175. d with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit To use the jack and spare tire follow the instructions below To use the tire sealant and compressor kit see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 82 6 82 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit A WARNING Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 3 32 Z WARNING Over inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure Do not exceed the recommended pressure A WARNING Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit there may not be a spare tire tire changing equipment and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire Th
176. dealer retailer XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a Satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at www xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and www xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 4 70 later in this section for further detail 4 59 Loading a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD begins playing When the CD is inserted the CD symbol displays As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm 3 in single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Ejecting a CD amp EJECT Press to eject the CD If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player Playing a CD If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source J Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing K SEEK Press to go to the start of the current tr
177. des Press the reset button to scroll through the available settings for each mode If you do not make a selection within ten seconds the display will go back to the previous information displayed Personalization Menu Modes OIL LIFE RESET When this feature is displayed you can reset the engine oil life system To reset the system see Engine Oil Life System on page 6 24 See OIL LIFE under DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 40 for more information 4 48 UNITS This feature allows you to select the units of measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle information When UNITS appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings ENGLISH default in United States All information will be displayed in English units METRIC default in Canada All information will be displayed in metric units To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC TIRE LEARN If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS and does not have Remote Keyless Entry RKE this feature allows the TPMS to relearn the tire positions After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor the TPMS must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions see Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 67 Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 and DIC W
178. dicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 34 Filling a Portable Fuel Container A WARNING Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete Do not smoke while pumping fuel Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel Checking Things Under the Hood An electric fan under the hood can start up and Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located under the instrument
179. ding on the audio system See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack and Using the USB Port under Radio s on page 4 54 Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel lt 4 Increases or decreases volume A V Press to change radio stations select tracks on a CD or to select tracks and navigate folders on an iPod or USB device E Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with the OnStar or Bluetooth systems D Press to reject an incoming call or to end a call For more information see Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 82 Bluetooth For vehicles with an in vehicle Bluetooth system it allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to make and receive hands free calls using the vehicle s audio system and controls The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with the in vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle Not all phones will support all functions See Bluetooth on page 4 71 Cruise Control The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel On Off RES Press to resume or accelerate speed SET Press to set or decrease speed For more information see Cruise Control on page 4 7 Power Outlets Accessory power outlets can be used to connect auxiliary electrical equipment such
180. dows and Other Power Options Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows When the current load is too heavy the fuse opens protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed 6 115 Fuses The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses circuit breakers and fusible links This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse If the band is broken or melted replace the fuse Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle one in the center of the instrument panel one in the engine compartment and one in the trunk 6 116 There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel fuse block It can be used to easily remove fuses from the fuse block Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side of the vehicle on the lower portion of the instrument panel console near the floor Remove the console cover to access the fuse block then remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses The vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and features listed GLUSTER THEFT Evers ed NOT INSTALLED Reet Tea een ONSTAR AIRBAG IGN HVAC BLOWER HIGH PEDAL WIPER SW STI L NOT ILLUM INSTALLED RADIO e POWER WADAS Soon RODRNEAT SEAT
181. driver door is opened All these features operate when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damage the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped 3 21 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position
182. dry To prevent this from happening after the air in the vehicle has cooled turn the recirculation mode off Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window GW REAR Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light comes on to indicate that the rear window defogger is on Be sure to clear as much snow as possible from the rear window If driving below 80 km h 50 mph the rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is pressed If turned on again the defogger only runs for about seven and one half minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine If the vehicle s speed is maintained above 80 km h 50 mph the rear window defogger remains on once the button is pressed If the vehicle has the remote start feature the rear defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside When the vehicle transitions out of the remote start mode the rear defogger turns off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid Remote Vehicle Start If the vehicle has the remote start feature it will tu
183. dseeieeseneee eave ar eee aan 4 13 Door Alar R MInGen ones eden wetmennwennmeenen hacen 3 9 Automatic Door LOCK cceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 3 9 Delayed Locking eceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeenees 3 9 EOCKS arien bleen A AORE EEEE 3 8 Power Locks J tuesisinosiialvntia ne ei 3 8 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock 3 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS ceeeeeeeeee ees 3 10 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeeeeeees 4 39 DIC Operation and Displays eeeeeeeeee 4 40 DIC Vehicle Personalization eeeeeeeeee 4 47 DIC Warnings and Messages ceeeeeeeeee 4 42 Driver Shift Control DSC If Equipped 3 27 Driving RENEE erretiroen e a ere 5 11 Before a Long Trip 2 sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 13 DGIONSING aiena e aa 5 2 DUNK a ori nes miscens a 5 2 Highway Hypnosis 22 25 har bleen miens 5 13 Driving cont Hill and Mountain Roads 5 14 In Rain and on Wet Roads ieee 5 12 OSS orGONHFON iiscicadexertethesncneegacse hi Hi SEE hen 5 10 Off Road Recovery eceeeeeeeeeeneee een eeeeeneees 5 9 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 18 NAAR TT seeen a E A 5 15 Driving for Better Fuel Economy sccccccccceeen 1 21 Driving ON Grades seses mesos inane nI EE 5 32 Driving on Snow or Ice eeeeeee eee eee eee eeee renerne 5 15 Driving with a Trailer 0c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eees 5 31 Dual Tone Multi F
184. dtop button to fully open or close the top See Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information TOP OVER TEMP Temperature If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor temperature is too hot Wait for the hardtop pump motor to cool down before using the retractable hardtop See Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information TOP TOO COLD If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop this message displays when the retractable hardtop button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor temperature is too cold Wait for the hardtop pump motor to warm up before using the retractable hardtop See Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information TRACTION OFF If your vehicle has the Traction Control System TCS this message displays and the TCS light on the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the system is turned off Adjust your driving accordingly See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 and Traction Off Light on page 4 32 for more information Have the system serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible TRUNK AJAR This message displays when the trunk is not closed completely Make sure that the trunk is closed complete
185. during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicle with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above OF 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord On the 2 4L L4 ECOTEC engine the engine coolant heater cord is located near the air cleaner box on the passenger side of the engine compartment On the 3 5L 3 6L and 3 9L V6 engines the engine coolant heater cord is located on the driver side around the battery box See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for more information on location 3 Plug the cord into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A WARNING Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a deale
186. e Have your vehicle serviced immediately by your dealer retailer SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays when there is a problem with the airbag system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately SERVICE ESC ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control ESC this message displays and a chime sounds if there has been a problem detected with ESC The ESC light also appears on the instrument panel cluster When this message displays the system is not working Adjust your driving accordingly See Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 and Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light on page 4 32 for more information If this message turns on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on If this message still stays on or turns back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the ESC inspected by your dealer retailer as soon as possible SERVICE TRACTION If your vehicle has the Traction Control System TCS this message displays and a chime sounds when the system is not functioning properly The TCS light may also appears on the instrument panel cluster When this message displays the system is not working Adjust your driving accordingly See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 and Traction Off Light on page 4 32 for more information
187. e engine after a cash has occurred In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 8 16 and Event Data Recorders on page 8 17 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG amp OFF ON 2 M S A United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off are visible during the system check If you are using remote start if equipped to start the vehicle from a
188. e number to be re entered 4 After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them After the complete number has been entered say Store The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone Say a name tag for the phone number The name ta
189. e turn the fan and mode knobs to the AUTO position The fan speed and air delivery modes will change to achieve the best comfort If the outside air temperature is below 7 C 45 F and the air delivery mode knob is set to AUTO the automatic climate control system starts in the defrost mode to clear the window The automatic climate control changes back to manual operation by turning the vehicle on with the key Manual Operation The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually adjusted O Off Turns off the entire climate control system Outside air still enters the vehicle and is directed to the floor This direction can be changed by adjusting the air delivery mode position Fan Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed VY A Temperature Control Press the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle Air Delivery Mode Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the air delivery settings Select from the following modes gt o s4 Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets Wi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets 4 21 ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the side window outlets and windshield a7 Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air directed to the floor and windshield outlets W Defr
190. e 6 110 Weatherstrip sisi Vecieterieiesess len nians 6 110 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 6 112 Clearing the System ccceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 81 Climate Control System ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 4 16 Outlet Adjustment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 24 Climate Control Systems AULOMAUGC i50chccpiaeesiinewededinaacuecdaladeestdiandes 4 20 Climate Controls rd iriso s 1 13 Clock Setting c cece ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 53 Cold Temperature Operation c eeeeeeeeee ee 6 23 Collision Damage Repair 0seeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 11 Collision Parts lt a onee be rr Ha red 8 12 Compact Spare Tire slanker 6 106 GOMPASS menan on aA TEE 3 35 Compass Calibration si 322 saven buske snes 3 35 Compass Operation cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 3 35 Compass Variance cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 3 35 Compressor Kit Tire Sealant 2 6 82 Configurations for Use of Child Restraints Sedan Only serisonu naen o ues 2 45 Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod 4 67 Content Theft Deterrent eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 3 16 Control of a Vehicle ce ceeeeeeeeeeeee i aas 5 3 Convenience Net ccceeeeeeneeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeenes 3 37 Coolant ENGINE eaan 6 31 Engine Temperature Gage ceeeeeeeeee ees 4 33 Engine Temperature Warning Light 4 33 Cooling SYSTEM cccwseiei gs ccoenchecnd
191. e Start cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 3 5 Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister 6 89 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire scents ere ena oaa EEE INS 6 93 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 00 5 6 91 Repair Facility aa rs mee re serene 8 12 Replacement Bulbs ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 54 Replacement Parts Maintenance sieisen an aoe arias 7 11 Replacing Brake System Parts 0 0eeeee 6 41 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government eeceeeeeeeeeeeen eee 8 15 General MOtors sisikii pareria anii 8 15 US GOVENNMENE ye neriie ninnaa aei 8 14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems 008 2 74 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a E e e o T E E EE E inhentdvendsiedaeeedes 2 75 Retained Accessory Power RAP ccecce 3 21 Retractable Hardtop ascscsisesrereresennrnrrnrerenenna 3 38 Lowering Aroor oea aa SERENE E E ET 3 38 RASIN e E ere 3 41 Ride Control Systems ceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeen eneen 5 5 Electronic Stability ESC 1 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeee eee ee 5 5 Roadside Assistance Program cseeeeeeeee es 8 7 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 5 18 Roof Retractable Hardtop cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 3 38 SUMOO 22594 aen E E tonnes 3 37 Running the Vehicle While Parked 0 3 33 Safety Belt Pretensioners c eceeeeeeeneee tenes 2 31 Safety Belt R
192. e bottom of the switch to turn the feature off The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is turned off On vehicle s with heated front seats press the top of the switch to turn the feature on to the high heat setting The indicator light 2 will be lit Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the drivers seat only when the vehicle is not moving A WARNING If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked On seats with manual reclining seatbacks the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seatback 1 Lift the recline lever 2 Move the seatback to the desired position then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To return the seatback to an upright position 1 Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback returns to the upright position 2 Release the lever to lock the seatback 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
193. e brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 4 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 4 31 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and conti
194. e control is set at a desired speed and the brakes are applied This disengages the cruise control The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster also goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged To return to the previously set speed you do not need to go through the set process again Once at a speed of about 40 km h 25 mph or more press the RES symbol briefly This takes the vehicle back up and maintains the previously chosen speed Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed e If the cruise control system is already engaged press the RES symbol Hold it there until the speed desired is reached and then release the button To increase the vehicle speed in very small amounts press the RES symbol briefly and then release it Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 6 km h 1 mph faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already engaged Push and hold the SET symbol until the lower speed desired is reached then release it To slow down in very small amounts push the SET symbol briefly Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 6 km h 1 mph slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills Ho
195. e desired category tab to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 4 To go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category do one of the following e Turn dd Press the softkeys below the right or left arrows on the radio display Press SEEK or bl SEEK 5 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the softkey below the XM CAT tab 3 Turn dd to display the category to be removed 4 Press the softkey below the Remove tab until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove additional categories Removed categories can be restored by pressing the softkey under the Add tab when a removed category displays or by pressing the softkey below the Restore All tab Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error Displays if the radio is no longer calibrated properly for the vehicle The vehicle must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Loc or Locked Displays when the THEFTLOCK system has activated Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your
196. e fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on Low Fuel Warning Light This light on the fuel gage comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel To turn it off add fuel to the fuel tank Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC The DIC display gives you the status of many of your vehicle s systems The DIC is also used to display driver personalization menu modes and warning status messages All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster The DIC buttons are ma located on the left side of the steering wheel INFO Information Press this button to scroll through the vehicle information mode displays Reset Press this button to reset some vehicle information mode displays select a personalization menu mode setting or acknowledge a warning message Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the same time for one second then release the buttons to enter the personalization menu See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 for more information 4 39 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC comes on when the ignition is on The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons The button functions are detailed in the following Information Modes INFO Information Press this button to scroll through the following vehicle information modes Outside Air T
197. e not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the batteries Find the positive and negative terminal locations on each vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for more information on location A WARNING An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 6 44 A WARNING Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some things you should know Positive will go to positive or to aremote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative
198. e outside of the windshield with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades Bugs road grime sap anda buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal Aluminum Wheels Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels 6 112 Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish
199. e sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes This will help to inflate the tire faster Always do a safety check first See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 81 Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 6 89 Unwrap the sealant air hose F and the power plug G Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise Attach the sealant air hose F onto the tire valve stem Turn it clockwise until it is tight Plug the power plug G into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 15 If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet do not use the cigarette lighter If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter use the cigarette lighter Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window Start the vehicle The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor Turn the selector switch B clockwise to the Sealant Air position Press the on off A button to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on The compressor will inject sealant and air into
200. e sealants could damage the TPMS sensors See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 6 82 for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dea
201. e service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may a
202. e steps while the engine is still running to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes Remote start can be extended one time After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON RUN To manually shut off a remote start Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and release the remote start button Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the ignition switch ON RUN and then LOCK OFF The parking lamps will turn off to indicate the engine is off Your vehicle s engine can be started two times per ignition cycle using the transmitter s remote start feature If the remote start procedure is used again before the first 10 minute time frame has ended the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any of the follow occur The remote start system is disabled through the DIC The vehicle s key is in the ignition The vehicle s hood is open The hazard warning flashers are on The check engine light is on See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4 34 The engine coolant temperature is too high The oil pressure is low e Two remote vehicle starts have already
203. e temperature to the desired setting To use the automatic mode turn the knob to AUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing V or A Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window G3 Rear Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light above the button comes on to indicate that the rear window defogger is on If driving below 80 km h 50 mph the rear window defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is pressed If turned on again the defogger only runs for about seven and one half minutes before turning off If the vehicle s speed is maintained above 50 mph 80 km h the rear window defogger remains on once the button is pressed If the vehicle has the remote start feature the rear defogger automatically turns on if it is cold outside but the indicator light does not come on When the vehicle transitions out of remote start mode the rear defogger turns off Notice Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass These actions may damage the rear defogger Repairs would not be covered by your warranty 4 23 Outlet Adjustment Rotate the instrument panel outlets and move the louvers on the outlets to change the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air in
204. e tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tread area of the tire It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire If the tire has been separated from the wheel has damaged sidewalls or has a large puncture the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions The kit includes A On Off Button D Pressure Gage B Selector Switch E Air Only Hose Black Sealant Air or F Sealant Air Air Only Hose Clear C Pressure Relief G Power Plug Button 6 83 Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the compressor Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer retailer See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following There is only enough sealant to seal one tire After usage the sealant canister and sealant air hose assembly must be replaced See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following 6 84 Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage When using the tir
205. e using include the wheel wrench A 1 Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to and jack B loosen the wheel wrench 2 Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack 6 92 3 Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressing the button with your index finger and pulling on the end of the wrench You must do this before using the wheel wrench Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1 It is recommended a safety check is done before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 90 for more information If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has plastic wheel nut caps then loosen the plastic nut caps You may need to use the wheel wrench to loosen them Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps that have plastic wheel nut caps Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the wheel to locate the wheel nuts If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without plastic wheel nut caps gently pry on the edge of the plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel to find the wheel nuts Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flat is repaired or replaced 6 93 4 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Do not remove them yet 6 94 5 Position the lift head at the jack location nearest the flat tire Make sure all of the jack lift head is touching the jacking flange under the body Do not place the jack under a body panel The lower body panel has an arrow to aid in locating the j
206. e vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 67 for additional information Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS turns on the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster 6 67 At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
207. e was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 78 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load ESS COOGEE 54 i OL Sivan Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat 6 59 If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 6 106 and lf a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 81 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire
208. eatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbony MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle
209. ececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 10 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Record 2 es ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeers 7 14 Maintenance Replacement Parts 5 7 11 Owner Checks and Services eeeeeeeee eres 7 8 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 10 Scheduled Maintenance cceeeeeeeeee eee eees 7 3 Maintenance When Trailer Towing 028 5 33 Maintenance I vinicceceuisscccssicscktivnias dere elser E 7 3 Maintenance Ta he o ond 7 4 Making a Call ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 77 Making TUMIS c ci ncscievesevesesoesenladsaeenteeeaielecdens 5 31 Malfunction Indicator Lamp n se 4 34 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process 8 14 Manual LOCKS irera enan a atti circa 1 5 Manual Reclining Seatbacks eeeeeeeeeeee es 2 7 Manual Seats c cccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 6 2 4 Manual Shift Mode MSM If Equipped 3 26 Maximum Air Conditioning eeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 18 Message DIC Warnings and Messages 0 eeeeeeee 4 42 Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance 0 eeeees 8 6 Automatic Dimming Rearview Manual Rearview Outside Convex Mirror Outside Power Mirrors My GM Canada Canada www gm ca Net Convenience New Vehicle Break In Engine Oil Life System Pressure Light Older Childre
210. eck the fuse See Fuses on page 6 116 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam push the turn signal multifunction lever away from you This instrument panel cluster light D comes on if the high beam lamps are turned on while the ignition is in ON RUN To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam pull the turn signal lever toward you Flash to Pass This feature lets the high beam headlamps be used to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass Pull the turn signal multifunction lever toward you until the high beam headlamps come on then release the lever to turn them off Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper lever is on the right side of the steering wheel Move the lever to control the windshield wipers O Off Turns the windshield wipers off SY Intermittent Speed Sensitive Wipers For intermittent or speed sensitive operation The amount of delay time varies between wiping cycles due to the delay setting selected or the speed of the vehicle As vehicle speed is increased or decreased the wiper interval also increases or decreases lt 2 Delay Move the lever to the S position then turn the 792 band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes GERD Low Speed Slow wipes oe High Speed Fast wipes W Mist Single wipe move the lever down then release it Several wipes hold the lever down Clear ice and snow from
211. ecline the seatback tilt the top of the control forward or rearward control forward or rearward Raise or lower the front or rear of the seat by moving See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 7 the front or rear of the control up or down See Power Seats on page 2 5 Power Lumbar Heated Seats If Equipped Press the front A or rear B of the control to increase On vehicle s with heated front seats press the top of or decrease lumbar support the switch to turn the feature on to the high heat setting The indicator light 2 will be lit Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat setting The indicator light 1 will be lit Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is turned off See Heated Seats on page 2 6 See Power Lumbar on page 2 5 1 8 Safety Belt Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly Safety Belts They Are for Everyone on page 2 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 20 Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2 28 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 46 Sensing System for Passenger Airbag The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat mounted side impact airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags and roof rail airbags are not affected by this The p
212. ed calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 2 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts
213. ed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 11 We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Rotation of New Tires To maintain ride handling and performance of the vehicle it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 5 000 to 8 000 miles See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 Scheduled Maintenance When the Change Oil Soon Message Displays Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 6 21 An Emission Control Service When the Change Oil Soon message displays service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km 600 miles If driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work and reset the system If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally service the vehicle within 5 000 km 3 000 miles since the last service Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 24 When the Change Oil Soon message displays certain services checks and inspections are required The services described for Maintenance I should be performed at every
214. ed to determine fuel range is an average of recent driving conditions As your driving conditions change this data is gradually updated The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset MPG L 100 KM AVG Average Press the information button until MPG L 100 KM AVG displays This mode shows how many liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or miles per gallon mpg your vehicle is getting based on current and past driving conditions To reset the average fuel economy press and hold the reset button while MPG L 100 KM AVG is displayed Average fuel economy is then calculated starting from that point If the average fuel economy is not reset it is continually updated each time you drive MPG L 100 KM INST Instantaneous Press the information button until MPG L 100 KM INST displays This mode shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and changes frequently as driving conditions change This mode shows the instantaneous fuel economy in liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km or miles per gallon mpg Unlike average fuel economy this screen cannot be reset AV Average SPEED Press the information button until AV SPEED displays This mode shows the vehicle s average speed in kilometers per hour km h or miles per hour mph To reset the average vehicle speed press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED is displayed OIL LIFE Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays The engine oil life system shows
215. eeeeee es 4 15 Battery Replacement e seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeers 3 5 Belt Routing Engine c eceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 12 Bench Seat Split 60 40 ec eeeeeeeeeeeee eee 2 13 Blizzard Conditions cccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 16 Bluetooth Controls ccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 72 Bluetooth sesiis coh oh ond t ihe nis 4 71 Brake EM rQenCleS si head cade seas odd 5 5 Brake Adjustment user nere eee eres 6 41 Brake Flid arrene R lee 6 39 Brake Pedal Travel rn rn beg dear 6 41 Brake Wear 53k sanese hunter bes 6 41 Brakes esc hee aa de aen are evan canes 6 39 Antil0Gk oenina s E Rate 5 4 Parkingi osrin r a 3 29 System Warning Light cceeeeeeeeeee eens 4 30 Braking personsa vena aed E E a EEEE 5 3 Braking in Emergencies cceeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 5 5 Break In New Vehicle cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 20 Bulb Replacement e eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 54 Center High Mounted Stoplamp GAM SLY i orn be a EE NL ERE 6 49 6 50 Fog LAMPS esiccgeishiacaccissenecugthaeeaesdswedcneadcae 4 12 Halogen Bulbs srecna rron A r eels 6 47 Headlamp Aiming seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeers 6 47 Headlamps sansen red rande here Heer 6 47 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps ceeeeeeeeeeeenee ees 6 48 License Plate Lamps 2 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 54 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps
216. eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 37 Windshield Washer Fluid a s 6 38 Brake SE re E ocean stare 6 39 Battery oaren roike ren ISA EAN 6 42 JUMP Stang ccctcisc cca arenon 6 43 Headlamp Aiming cceceeeeeeeeee eee eee tees 6 47 Bulb Replacement l n 6 47 Halogen BUDS 52255 hos ost Eee ERR 6 47 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lampshade it 6 48 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Sedan eeeeee 6 49 6 1 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Retractable Hardtop ANG COUPE amer saas sjaler Flora teen ORE neue Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps Sedan Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps Coupe W u dcsserererreree Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps Retractable Hardtop License Plate Lamp eceeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees Replacement Bulbs sceeeeeeeeereeeeeeees Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement MRCS esea ahaa Winter TIKES si cciecsncitcncestacnaccters coc ecigetyenentnase Tire Sidewall Labeling eceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees Tire Terminology and Definitions Inflation Tire Pressure e eeeeeeeeeeeee eee High Speed Operation c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees Tire Pressure Monitor System 0eeeeeees Tire Pressure Monitor Operation Tire Inspection and Rot
217. ehicle damage This would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator Cl This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index i Airbag Readiness Light X Air Conditioning amp Antilock Brake System ABS Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Brake System Warning Light ER Charging System amp Cruise Control E Engine Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamps 40 Fog Lamps D Fuel Gage Fuses D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 9 LATCH System Child Restraints O Malfunction Indicator Lamp Y7 Oil Pressure O gt ee OD Power Remote Vehicle Start Safety Belt Reminders Tire Pressure Monitor Traction Control Windshield Washer Fluid 42 NOTES vi Se
218. ehicle on page 2 72 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates Z WARNING Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 2 71 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 A WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so 2 72 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q A Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly Yes If you add things that change the vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts
219. elts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 2 36 or Infants and Young Children on page 2 39 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 28 for more information Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar The seat mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door 2 62 L 1 gt aE Wee og Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If the vehicle has roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers they are in the ceiling above the side windows A WARNING If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe
220. eminder Light c cseeeeeeeees 4 27 Safety BEMIS cas ste Kasner ge inaa D ROKADE NED EDER 2 74 85 580 sicessccrtavenatecsiaadaeadicantemntexroadseaseness 6 110 gt lt 1 916 en eee ner ere 2 35 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 2 20 Safety Belts cont Lap Shoulder Belt ccceceseeeeeneeeeeneeee es Reminder ss EN le ere kajer Safety Belts Are for Everyone Use During Pregnancy 2222 craps uken eens Safety Chains si22 cceiiestien does a eteee dade Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government eseeeeeeeneeeeee eens General Motors scceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees U S Government ar ES araa Safety Warnings and Symbols 2 Scheduled Maintenance eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees Scheduling Appointments Sealant Kit Tire ccceceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Seatback Latch Seats 60 40 Split Bench Seat ceceeeeeeee eee Easy Entry Seatin uiconsescadfentuctincgien edad Head Restraints ccccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenenes Heated Seats Power Lit Seat eroana NEET Power Lumbar ccccceceeeeeeeeteeeceeeeeerenes Power S alS u im cscitesicbes dian ia eaten aia Reclining Seatbacks Seatback Latch ccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position Right Front Seat Position eeeeeeeeeeees Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the MeMICIG cages ce aa DE e ES SEE A EE
221. emperature The outside air temperature will be displayed at the same time as the Odometer and the Trip Odometer The temperature outside of the vehicle will be displayed in either degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F The outside air temperature appears on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer or trip odometer appears on the right side of the display Odometer Press the information button until the outside air temperature and the odometer displays This mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers km or miles mi To change the DIC display to English or metric units see UNITS under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 4 40 Trip Odometer Press the information button until the outside air temperature along with A or B displays These modes show the current distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either kilometers km or miles mi Both odometers can be used at the same time To reset the trip odometer to zero press and hold the reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is displayed FUEL RANGE Press the information button until FUEL RANGE displays This mode shows the remaining distance you can drive without refueling in either kilometers km or miles mi It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank When the fuel level is low FUEL RANGE LOW displays The fuel economy data us
222. en the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer 5 29 Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification Tire label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed Here are some rules to follow The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed If there are then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed If the holes are not sealed dirt water and deadly carbon monoxide CO from the exhaust can get into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 3 32 in the Index for more information 5 30 Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about
223. ended attention to entertainment tasks while driving This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations For more information see Defensive Driving on page 5 2 Notice Contact your dealer retailer before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 3 21 for more information Setting the Clock To set the time and date 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN Press D to turn the radio on 2 Press and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year displays 3 Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs that you want to change 4 53 4 To increase the time or date do one of the following Radio s Press the softkey located below the selected tab e Press DI SEEK or DD FWD e Turn J clockwise 5 To decrease the time or date do one of the
224. engine oil change The services described for Maintenance II should be performed when Maintenance I was performed the last time the engine oil was changed It has been 10 months or more since the Change Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last service Maintenance I Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 6 21 An Emission Control Service Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 Windshield washer fluid level check See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 Tire inflation check See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 Rotate tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 Fluids visual leak check or every 12 months whichever occurs first A leak in any system must be repaired and the fluid level checked Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles driven in dusty conditions only See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Brake system inspection or every 12 months whichever occurs first Maintenance II Perform all services described in Maintenance I Steering and suspension inspection Visual inspection for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Engine cooling system inspection Visual inspection of hoses pipes fittings and clamps and replacement if needed Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear cracking or contamination and windshield and wiper blade clean
225. ens 4 33 Malfunction Indicator Lamp eeeeeeeeeeeee 4 34 Oil Pressure Light cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 37 SOCUNTY WIGHT ass landsdele run iieii 4 37 Cruise Control Light larsen 4 38 Highbeam On Light a an 4 38 Fuel GAJE meeten dianas eeano e decd 4 38 Low Fuel Warning Light a src 4 39 Driver Information Center DIC 4 39 DIC Operation and Displays eeeeeeeeees 4 40 DIC Warnings and Messages eeeeeeeeees 4 42 DIC Vehicle Personalization c eeeeeeeeees 4 47 Instrument Panel Audio System s 0 ceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 53 Setting the CIOCK ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeaes 4 53 Radio S esae ae Ea EE ED 4 54 USING al MPS cncadeansimastincaseattventtaresaetondinentd 4 63 XM Radio Messages ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 4 70 Bluetooth ag aorta e a ia 4 71 Theft Deterrent Feature sssseeeerseeerenrnr 4 81 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 4 82 Radio RECS Pll O Midas tcnscrsadcentiontuyninetareseewtondiecace 4 83 Fixed Mast Antenna Retractable Hardtop 4 84 Backglass Antenna Coupe and Sedan 4 84 XM Satellite Radio Antenna System 4 84 Instrument Panel Overview Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on the instrument panel to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns oth
226. entering the vehicle and maximize air conditioning performance The indicator light flashes three times if you try to use recirculation in a mode that it can not be used in Use this mode only when it is needed for comfort since window fogging occurs if the air conditioning compressor is not engaged Press C6 to cancel the outside air mode When you switch to the defog or defrost modes the system automatically moves from recirculation to outside air When the vehicle or fan is turned off and back on the system automatically defaults to outside air 4 18 Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on to indicate that the air conditioning is on The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air So sometimes a small amount of water drips under the vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned off This is normal Maximum Air Conditioning On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently For quick cool down on hot days do the following 1 Select the vent mode 2 Select the highest fan speed 3 Select air conditioning 4 Select the CSS recirculation mode 5 Select the coolest temperature Using these settings together for long periods of time can cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
227. ers that you are having trouble Press A again to turn the flashers off Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted The lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel up or down or backward or forward into a comfortable position 3 Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column operates the following Turn and Lane Change Signals ZD D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Exterior Lamp Control Flash to Pass Information for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals gt Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until lane change is complete The lever returns to its starting position when it is released If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on a signal bulb could be burned out Have the bulbs replaced If the bulb is not burned out ch
228. es 2 4 Power SES uenee n Elk Ehe REE 2 5 Power Lumbar 235 saae are a 2 5 Heated Seats 22535 abs He e 2 6 Reclining Seatbacks ecrini nea 2 7 Seatback Latch ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenes 2 10 Easy Entry Seat ccccececeersaasstetecescatcvecseeneetet 2 11 Power Lift Seat ccccceceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 Rear Seats oaie aee e a centers 2 13 60 40 Split Bench Seat Sedan and COUPE 0 er LE ERE 2 13 Safety BeltS v ic0c dace narrate a 2 14 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 2 14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 2 20 Lap Shoulder Belt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 2 28 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 0 2 35 Safety Belt Extender cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 2 35 Child Restraints 00 ee 2 36 Older Children sirier esi soreteseseediaw iad ania 2 36 Infants and Young Children cceeeeeeeees 2 39 Child Restraint Systems eeeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 42 Where to Put the Restraint cee 2 44 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH 0 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 46 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 54 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ee 2 56 Airbag System cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeee ees 2 59 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 61 When Shou
229. ess multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks DI SEEK Press to go to the next track Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release lt REV to resume playing The elapsed time of the file displays b gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release bb FWD to resume playing The elapsed time of the file displays i Information Press to display additional information about the selected track 4 67 Using Softkeys to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The five softkeys below the radio display are used to control the functions listed below To use the softkeys 1 Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display to display the functions listed below or press the softkey below the function if it is currently displayed 2 Press the softkey below the tab with the function on it to use that function il Pause Press the softkey below Il to pause the track The tab appears raised when pause is being used Press the softkey below IE again to resume playback Back Press the softkey below the back tab to go back to the main display screen on an iPod or the root directory on a USB storage device 4 68 Folder View Press the softkey below to view the contents of
230. est away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle or even killed Find a level place to change your ire To hel h hicle f ing OE TATE H eee ee eee oan meg When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following 1 Set the parking brake firmly example as a guide to assist you in the placement 2 Put the shift lever in P Park of wheel blocks A WARNING Continued 6 90 3 If you have a sedan or coupe model remove the spare tire cover A B If you have a retractable hardtop model unlatch the A trunk cargo cover so that it is in the open position Then remove the cover from the spare tire A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 4 Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it Then remove the compact spare tire See Compact The equipment you will need is located in the trunk Spare Tire on page 6 106 for more information 1 If you have a retractable hardtop model make sure 5 Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place the hardtop is in the up position 6 Remove the extension bolt that is clipped to 2 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 for more the jack You will need this later to store the flat tire information 7 Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk 6 91 SDPDDDDDDDDDDD DDD DIE htm DDD DDD The tools you will b
231. etooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call 3 Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called 4 Once the call is connected press to link all the callers together Ending a Call Press CW VV to end a call Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Transferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone 4 79 To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired a
232. ew Tires eee 6 74 WISE besaat saipe oa ordne ll males ea 6 57 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 1 1 W1 1 1 1 1 3 23 MORGUE LOCK Sranan n ne 3 31 Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires 0 05 5 30 Towing Recreational Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 23 Towing a Maler scascisesi chs ne Er ER 5 27 YOUR VOMIGIC sranane a 5 23 TPMS Malfunction Light and Message 6 69 TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry RKE eee 6 70 TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles without Remote Keyless Entry RKE accessen 6 71 TPMS Sensor Matching Process 6 0ee 6 70 Traction Control System TCS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen ees 5 6 Off Lig ha re aT aR 4 32 Traction AA A B CeGssssseeeeeeeeeererreeereerreerrneer 6 78 Trailer Brakes cc cscccesesseleseideoetersdloevhenihestahead 5 30 Transferring a Call eise ceine aine Ehe Ene ben 4 79 Transmission Fluid Automate siicicatsci cinwstencsawecarceea ed 6 27 6 28 Transmission Operation Automatic 3 24 Transportation Options cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 8 10 Transportation Program Courtesy ee 8 10 WCAIWOAN omsnoeren T E 6 78 Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A 6 78 Trip Odometer 0 ceeeeec eee eeeeeee eee eee renerne nere 4 26 TRUK reiissi eencateriimenhelastides tobe i ia aa 3 11 Trunk Lam
233. f the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done See Engine Coolant for more information The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank If it is not you may have a leak in the cooling system How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank A WARNING Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the surge tank Z WARNING pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough
234. f a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 3 Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror Z WARNING Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Open a window about 5 cm two inches on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 3
235. favorite stations using the softkeys favorites button and steering wheel controls if equipped See Defensive Driving on page 5 2 FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations The current balance fade and tone settings are also stored with the favorite stations To store a station as a favorite 1 Tune to the desired radio station and set the balance fade and tone settings to the desired levels 2 Press FAV to display the page where to store the station 3 Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds 4 Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite To setup the number of favorites pages 1 Press MENU to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the softkey located below the FAV 1 6 tab 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press FAV or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin programming favorites Auto Text Satellite Radio Service CD MP3 and WMA features If additional
236. for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired Listing All Paired and Connected Phones Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone 4 73 Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone 4 Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete lt phone name gt Yes or No followed by a tone 5 Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting lt phone name gt Linking to a Different Phone 1
237. formation Label 5 19 e Sealant Concita aaee inia 6 84 E E T T 6 56 Aluminum Wheels Cleaning 2 0 86 6 112 Buying New TIreS csssencrireareiriiasiieneres 6 75 Chains dssiseerticitievesedasterdlnsietuaeesteil aks 6 81 Changing a Flat Tire ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 6 90 Cleaning sii adding Mierke 6 113 Compact Spare ss inaintea niihin cee 6 106 Different Size snrsisrerrriciinnsisioieninrerea nises 6 77 High Speed Operation cceeeeeeeneeeeee teers 6 66 If a Tire Goes Flat 2 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeen teers 6 81 Inflation Tire Pressure 1 0 0 0 eeeeeeee sere eee es 6 64 Inspection and Rotation seeeeeee ee eee 6 73 Installing the Spare Tire c eeeeeeeeee eee eees 6 93 Pressure Light ironin a naa ides 4 33 Pressure Monitor Operation eeeeeeeees 6 67 Pressure Monitor System cceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 66 Removing the Flat Tire ceseeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 93 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 6 91 Sealant and Compressor Kit 6 82 6 89 Sidewall Labeling cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 58 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 6 99 Terminology and Definitions c eee 6 61 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeee 6 78 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 6 79 Wheel Replacement sceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 79 When It Is Time for N
238. g 136 kg 300 Ibs trailering tips 150 Ibs x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight Ore KYUU 5 20 Example 2 Item Description Total Maximum Vehicle A Capacity oom for 000 Ibs Example 2 i Subtract Occupant Weight 68 kg 340 kg 750 Ibs 150 Ibs x 5 Example 3 Item Description Total Maximum Vehicle A Capacity soot for 7808 Ibs Example 3 Subtract Occupant 453 kg Weight 91 kg 1 000 Ibs 200 lbs x S Available Cargo Weight 113 kg 250 Ibs Available Cargo EA 0 kg 0 Ibs 5 21 Refer to the vehicle s Tire and Loading Information The label shows the gross weight capacity of your label for specific information about your vehicle s vehicle called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the positions The combined weight of the driver vehicle all occupants fuel cargo and tongue passengers and cargo should never exceed the weight if pulling a trailer vehicle s maximum vehicle capacity weight Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle or the Certification Label Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle S OM MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP met Dare GWR GAWRFRT A WARNING THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL gpl Na OTOR Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the VEHICLE SAFETY BUMPER NTION STANDARDS IN Gross Veh
239. g a Flat Tire and Tools GXP and Retractable Hardtop Models 006 6 101 Storing a Radio Station cc ceceeeeseeeeeeeee eee 4 56 Storing Name Tags ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 74 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools All Models Except Retractable Hardtop eeeee 6 104 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Retractable Hardtop Models ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 105 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 6 89 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 1 5 17 SUN VISOIS seipso eaae i E Aa EEEa venice 3 16 SUMMON Seow scar oea E E E dears 3 37 Sunshade Operation cccceseeeeeeeneeaeeaeeaes 3 37 Tachometer ecenin eaei 4 26 Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps 6 50 6 51 6 53 Telescopic Wheel nesretne aS 4 3 Temperature A B C ceceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 6 79 Text Telephone TTY Users asaca 8 6 Theft Deterrent Feature ccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 81 Theft Deterrent Systems ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 16 Content Theft Deterrent ceeeeeeeeeeneeee 3 16 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer 3 18 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operatii sarte gror Te E BORES RER 3 18 Three Way Calling occse 4 79 Tilt WRG or coseveivd stevens lant veeekosssebdeasavevetaads 4 3 Time Setting senose a aa oD 4 53 Tir Tir Tir 16 e and Loading In
240. g is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 4 75 Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags Delete Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 4 76 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete lt name tag gt Please say yes or no If the name tag is correct say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting lt name tag gt returning
241. ge 4 42 2 Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC 3 Press and hold the ENTER button for at least one second An ACKNOWLEDGED display message will appear for three seconds or until the next button is pressed This tells you the system has been reset See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 4 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil 6 25 Engine Air Cleaner Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 80 000 km 50 000 mile interval See Scheduled Maintenance on
242. ge or a building that has no fresh air ventilation WARNING Continued 3 32 Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you A WARNING ever have to here are some things to know A WARNING Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 3 32 It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting Into Park Automatic Transmission on page 3 30 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 3 33 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have a manual inside rearview mirror with the OnStar system Vehicles w
243. gine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 6 21 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for reservoir location AAAA AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with V6 engines Vehicles with the 4 cylinder engine have electric power steering and do not use power steering fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system or an unusual noise is heard A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired 6 37 How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The fluid level should be within the crosshatched area on the dipstick If the fluid is at or below the ADD mark on the dipstick add just enough fluid to bring the level within the crosshatched area What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 Always use
244. grammable automatic door unlock feature through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 Rear Door Security Locks Rear door security locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door The rear doors must be opened to access them Rn To use the lock 1 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position 2 Close the door 3 Do the same for the other rear door To open a rear door when the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the RKE transmitter if the vehicle has one the power door lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position 3 Do the same for the other rear door Lockout Protection If your vehicle has power door locks it will have this feature If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in the ignition and any door is open all the doors will lock and the driver s door will unlock Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing and holding the power door lock in the lock posit
245. h protection this way 2 21 Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way 2 22 A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle A WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you 2 23 Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest 2 24 A WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests Q What is wrong with this The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It sh
246. hased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For secur
247. hat have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 2 63 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags and seat mounted side impact airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 2 65 2 65 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too h
248. hat hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 Curb Weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production 6 62 GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicle
249. he webbing through the opening on the guide Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger A seat mounted side impact airbag for the driver Aseat mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger The vehicle may also have the following airbags A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver A roof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With seat mounted side impact airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A WARNING You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
250. he E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798 If you have trouble starting on E85 it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate If this happens switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting For good starting and heater efficiency below 32 F 0 C the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no more than 70 ethanol It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85 If you do switch fuels it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible do not add less than three gallons 11 L when refueling You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles 11 km to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline See Filling the Tank on page 6 11 Notice Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle s fuel system Do not add anything to E85 Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Fuels in Fore
251. he RKE transmitter is pressed ON default The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 52 LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC will display When LANGUAGE appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRENCH All messages will appear in French SPANISH All messages will appear in Spanish GERMAN All messages will appear in German To select a setting and exit out of the personalization menu mode press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC Exiting Personalization Menu The personalization menu will be exited when any of the following conditions occur Aten second time period has elapsed The ignition is turned off The end of the personalization menu list is reached Audio System s Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features A WARNING Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others Do not give ext
252. he driver side front tire 6 71 6 72 Remove the valve cap from the tire s valve stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for about eight seconds The horn chirp can take up to 30 seconds to sound It chirps one time and then all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the sensor identification code has been matched to the tire wheel position The passenger side front turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 The driver side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 11 12 After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver side rear tire two additional horn chirps sound to indicate the tire learning process is done The LEARN COMPLETE message displays if all four tire positions are learned Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn mode or if communication with the receiver stops or if the time limit has expired the TIRE LEARN message displays on the DIC Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF and start over begi
253. he radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers D Power Volume Turn to adjust the volume Additional volume adjustments may have to be made from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or not loud BAND Press to listen to the radio while a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing until it is stopped or turned off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD while a portable audio device is playing Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device Found may display Using the USB Port Radio s with a USB port can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs See Using an MP3 on page 4 63 for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod USB Support The USB connector is located on the front of the radio and uses the USB 2 0 standard USB Supported Devices USB Flash Drives e Portable USB Hard Drives Fifth generation or later iPod e iPod nanos iPod touch iPod classic Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple for proper operation iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes application See www apple com itunes For help with identifying your iPod go to www apple com suppo
254. he trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving on Grades Notice Do not tow on steep continuous grades exceeding 6 miles 9 6 km Extended higher than normal engine and transmission temperatures may result and damage the vehicle Frequent stops are very important to allow the engine and transmission to cool 5 32 Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce the vehicle s speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating If the engine does overheat see Engine Overheating on page 6 35 Parking on Hills A WARNING Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig ona flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer
255. he vehicle Set the temperature To find your comfort setting start with an initial temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate Press A and VV to adjust the temperature setting as necessary If the temperature setting of 15 C 60 F is chosen the system remains at the maximum cooling setting If the temperature setting of 32 C 90 F is chosen the system remains at the maximum heat setting Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool faster Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun load and also turns on the headlamps Also be careful not to cover the sensor grille on the lower right side of the climate control faceplate This senses the inside vehicle temperature needed for proper regulation To avoid blowing cold air at start up in cold weather the system delays turning on the fan until warm air is available The length of delay depends on the engine coolant temperature Turning the fan knob overrides this delay and change the fan to a selected speed If the vehicle has the remote start feature the climate control display initially shows RS in place of the temperature to indicate the remote start has been activated The remote start system turns on using the last temperature selected before the vehicle was last turned off For best performanc
256. here are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional The power window switches for all the windows are operation of the windows located on the driver s door armrest Each passenger door also has a power window switch for its own window Press the front of the switch to the first position to lower the window to the desired level Pull the switch up to raise the window Window Indexing Coupe and Retractable Hardtop This feature automatically lowers the window a small amount when the door is opened Then when the door is closed the window will automatically raise fully If the vehicle loses power or the window freezes this feature may not work From outside the vehicle close the door and push the window inward so that the glass goes under the molding Power Window Initialize Coupe and Retractable Hardtop After a power reconnect such as battery replacement the indexing feature will not function until the system is initialized This procedure needs to be done for each individual window Once power is restored 1 Close the door 2 Raise the window by pulling the power window switch up 3 Hold the window switch up for two seconds after the window is closed Release the switch Then hold the switch up again for two seconds 4 Lower the window all the way down Hold the switch down for two seconds 5 Repeat the procedure for each window including the rear quarter w
257. hicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments 2 46 Lower Anchors Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B Top Tether Anchor A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the to
258. hicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform 2 63 If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs 2 64 Your vehicle has seat mounted side impact airbags Your vehicle may or may not have roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 2 59 Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The thres
259. hicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 28 for more information including important safety information If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove the child restraint from the vehicle 3 Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 2 69 4 Reinstall the child restraint following the directions If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult Size Occupant provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 2 56 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints on page 2 2 6 Restart the vehicle If the on indicator is still lit with an infant present in a child restraint secure the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passenger seat
260. hile listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display 2 Press and release A or VV to scroll up or down the list then press and hold A to play the highlighted track To navigate folders on an iPod or USB device 1 Press and hold A or Y while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display 2 Press and hold V to go back to the previous folder list 3 Press and release or V to scroll up or down the list To select a folder press and hold A when the folder is highlighted To go back further in the folder list press and hold V C End Press to reject an incoming call or end a current call Eg Mute Voice Recognition Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar systems press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See Bluetooth on page 4 71 and the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range c
261. hold level can vary with specific vehicle design Seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts rollovers or rear impacts A seat mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck A roof rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For seat mounted side impact and roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with seat mounted side impact airbags there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows t
262. hrough flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 6 56 Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include e Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest
263. icle Weight Rating GVWR or EFFECT ON THE DAHAQF M WN ABOVE either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle 2000 ASS CAR Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle A Notice Overloading the vehicle may cause A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to damage Repairs would not be covered by the the driver side center pillar vehicle warranty Do not overload the vehicle 5 22 If things like suitcases tools packages or anything else are put inside the vehicle they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A WARNING Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle In the cargo area put them as far forward as you can Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the groun
264. icle has airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator for more information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 2 56 A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It i
265. icles Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel Your vehicle may run out of fuel The remote start feature provides two separate starts per ignition cycle each with 10 minutes of engine running time The remote start feature needs to be reset after your vehicle s engine is started two times using the transmitter s remote start button To reset the remote start feature insert the vehicle s key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON RUN See Ignition Positions on page 3 20 for information regarding the ignition positions on your vehicle If your vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 3 3 for additional information Q Remote Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the vehicle using the remote start feature 1 Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the transmitter s remote start button until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running 3 If itis the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven repeat thes
266. id at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 74 6 63 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Inflation Tire Pressure Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are operate effectively determined by tire manufacturers using government ee h testing procedures The ratings are molded into Notice Do not let anyone tell you that the sidewall of the tire See 74318Uniform Tire Quality Under inflation or over inflation is all right Grading on page 6 78 It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading Too much heat the Vehicle on page 5 18 Tire
267. ight comes on briefly while starting the vehicle ff An If it does not have the vehicle serviced by the dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off Notice Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat See Engine Overheating on page 6 35 The vehicle s engine could be damaged and it might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 6 35 for more information Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Canada United States This gage shows the engine coolant temperature If the gage pointer moves into the red area the light comes on and a chime sounds the engine is too hot It means that the engine coolant has overheated See Engine Overheating on page 6 35 Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system this light comes on briefly when the engine e is started It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System 4 33 When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See D
268. ign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island Turn off the engine when refueling Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle 6 11 To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right While refueling hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door
269. ill on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service If the light comes on while driving pull off the road and stop carefully The pedal can be harder to push or the pedal could go closer to the floor It could take longer to stop Try turning off and restarting the vehicle one or two times if the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5 23 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light The Antilock Brake System ABS light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 30 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for all brake related DIC messages 4 31 Tracti
270. in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable
271. indows on retractable hardtop models until all windows are initialized Express Down Window The express down feature lowers the window all the way without continuously pressing the AUTO switch On sedan and retractable hardtop models the driver s window has the express down feature On coupe models both the driver s and front passenger window have the express down feature The front passenger express down is activated by the driver s side switch only Press the front of the switch all the way down and release it to express open the window To stop the window while it is lowering pull the front of the switch up briefly 3 15 Window Lockout Sedan Only fas Window Lockout This button prevents the rear passengers from using their window switches The window lockout button is located near the driver s power window switches The driver can still operate all the windows and the front passenger can operate their own window with the lockout on Press the right side of the switch to turn the lockout feature on Press the left side to turn it off The red part of the switch is visible when you have returned to normal window operation Sun Visors Swing down the visors to block glare The visors can be removed from the center mount and swung to the side It can be moved along the rod from side to side in this position also Your vehicle may have lighted vanity mirrors on the driver s and passenger s visors When you
272. ine Octane on page 6 7 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 4 36 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Light This light comes on briefly while s
273. ing if contaminated See Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6 112 Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 55 Body hinges and latches key lock cylinders folding seat hardware and rear compartment hinges lubrication See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 More frequent lubrication may be required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Restraint system component check See Checking the Restraint Systems on page 2 74 Engine air cleaner filter inspection See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 6 26 Additional Required Services At Each Fuel Stop Engine oil level check See Engine Oil on page 6 21 Engine coolant level check See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 e Windshield washer fluid level check See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 Once a Month Tire inflation check See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 Tire wear inspection See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 Once a Year Starter switch check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 8 Parking brake and automatic transmission P Park mechanism check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 8 Automatic transmission shiftlock control system check See Owner Checks and Services on page 7 8 Ignition transmission lock check See Owner
274. ing through the opening on the guide Do not secure the child restraint with the safety belt routed through the guide Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 5 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 2 57 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 2 58 If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 for more information To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If your seat has a safety belt guide insert the safety belt into the guide on the head restraint by sliding t
275. injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat mounted side impact airbag Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object If the ve
276. ion for three seconds Trunk To open the trunk from the outside press and hold the trunk release button on the RKE transmitter You can also use the key in the trunk lock except on retractable hardtop models A WARNING Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate trunk hatch open or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk hatch or liftgate Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk hatch open Close all of the windows Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate disable the power liftgate function For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 3 32 Remote Trunk Release Press this button located on the driver s door near the map pocket to open the trunk You can open the trunk when the gear selector is in P Park When the retractable hardtop is down and stowed in the trunk the trunk open function will be disabled When the ignition is on the TRUNK NOT ALLOW message will be displayed on the DIC when attempting to open the trunk with the retract
277. ior body to remove the guide from its storage clip 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 2 33 A WARNING A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriouslyinjured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip and then slide the guide onto the clip Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them between the seatback and the interior body leaving only the loop of the elastic cord exposed 2 34 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way
278. it is locked Power Reclining Seatbacks am CH If the seats have power reclining seatbacks the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control To recline the seatback tilt the top of the control rearward To bring the seatback forward tilt the top of the control forward Z WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving Seatback Latch On vehicles with this feature it provides easy access to the rear seats To operate the seatback latch pull up on the manual recline lever The seatback will automatically spring forward To operate the latch from A WARNING the rear seat pull back on the top of the manual recline lever You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manua
279. it indicates that an oil change is necessary A CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system After changing the engine oil and filter the system must be reset To reset the oil life system 1 With the CHANGE OIL SOON message displayed press any of the three DIC buttons to clear the CHANGE OIL SOON message See DIC Warnings and Messages on pa
280. ite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion 1 23 OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar hands free calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4 82 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information 1 24 Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated Press to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active Section 2 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints ccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Front Seats oeenn Ais ernie 2 4 Manual Seats 0cccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae
281. ith OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the OnStar system and how to subscribe to OnStar Also see the OnStar owners guide for more information about the services OnStar provides Adjust the mirror to see clearly behind your vehicle Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind your vehicle Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and to the left for daytime use 3 34 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass display and or OnStar controls For more information about OnStar see the OnStar owners guide Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See the OnStar owners guide for more information about the service OnStar provides For vehicles with OnStar D On Off Press to turn the dimming feature on or off For vehicles without OnStar AUTO OFF Press AUTO OFF to turn the dimming feature on or off Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started Compass Compass Oper
282. ity reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest Pontiac dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped must be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required
283. k Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB storage device To connect a USB storage device connect the device to the USB port located on the front of the radio To connect an iPod connect one end of the USB cable that came with the iPod to the iPod s dock connector and connect the other end to the USB port located on the front of the radio If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works OK to disconnect and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and iPod appears on the radio s display The iPod music appears on the radio s display and begins playing The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if the vehicle is in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position When the vehicle is turned off the iPod automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the vehicle s battery If you have an older iPod model that is not supported it can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3 5 mm 1 8 in stereo cable See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more information Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio s display J Tune Turn to select files K SEEK Press to go to the start of the track if more than ten seconds have played Press and hold or pr
284. k as you maintain brake application Press the shift lever button and then move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 3 31 later in this section R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 17 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Also use N Neutral when the vehicle is being towed A WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy
285. l This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid When the brake fluid falls to a low level the BRAKE FLUID message in the Driver Information Center DIC displays See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 6 40 Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 110 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving except when applying the brake pedal firmly A WARNING The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are firs
286. l driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving A WARNING If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked Lift the seatback up to return it to the upright position Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Easy Entry Seat To use the easy entry seat A WARNING If the easy entry right front seat is not locked it can move In a sudden stop or crash the person sitting there could be injured After you have used it be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked A WARNING 1 Remove the safety belt from the headrest mounted guide If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked If your vehicle is a two door model the front passenger seat can be moved to make it easier to get in and out of the rear seat Power Lift Seat I 2 Pull back on the top of the recliner lever The seatback will move forward To adjust a power lift seat press the
287. lation Control C Temperature F Air Conditioning Control G Rear Window D Outside Air Defogger 1 13 Vehicle Features Radio s Spe ee te on KE BEJECT K A K D gt BAND SEEK i SEEK REV FAD CD AUX O Radio with CD MP3 and USB Port shown D Press to turn the system on and off Turn to increase or decrease the volume BAND Press to choose between FM AM or XM if equipped d Select radio stations 1 14 K pl Seek or scan stations 1 Press to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or CD MP3 WMA song Song title information will be displayed on the top line of the display while the artist information will be displayed on the bottom line if the information is available during XM CD MP3 or WMA playback For more information about these and other radio features see Radio s on page 4 54 Storing a Favorite Station Depending on which radio the vehicle has radio stations are stored as either favorites or presets For vehicles with an XM radio a maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM
288. lation pressure Wipe off any sealant from the wheel tire and vehicle Dispose of the used sealant canister and sealant air hose F assembly at a local dealer retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer retailer After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit take the vehicle to an authorized dealer retailer within a 100 miles 161 km of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant Always do a safety check first See f a Tire Goes Flat on page 6 81 1 Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 6 89 2 Unwrap the air only hose E and the power plug G 6 87 3 Place the kit on the ground Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it 4 Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise 5 Attach the air only hose E onto the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight 6 Plug the power plug G into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 15 If the vehicle has
289. layed in order by artist or album The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the disc The radio may begin playing while it is scanning in the background When the scan is finished the disc begins playing files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist 4 66 To listen to files by another artist press the softkey located below either arrow tab The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist displays To change from playback by artist to playback by album 1 Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab 2 Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from the sort screen 3 Press the softkey below the back tab to return to the main music navigator screen The album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album have played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the softkey below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playbac
290. ld an Airbag Inflate ee 2 63 What Makes an Airbag Inflate e 2 65 How Does an Airbag Restrain ceee 2 65 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 2 65 Passenger Sensing System ceeeeeeeeeees 2 67 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 2 72 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VENICE a Se rr Eee TE TE NERE 2 72 Restraint System Check 0 eceeeeeee teens 2 74 Checking the Restraint Systems 2 74 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 2cievicvisscelavicoeresidchianstiaencen 2 75 2 1 Head Restraints The vehicle s front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions A WARNING With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck spinal injury in a crash Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash 7 Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place The head re
291. ld be warm after usage 6 86 12 Unplug the power plug G from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle 13 Turn the sealant air hose F counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem 14 Replace the tire valve stem cap 15 Replace the sealant air hose F and the power plug G back in their original location 16 If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister and place it in a highly visible location The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced rary repair op P ain Hy fuo sede kreds 17 Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle 18 Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km to distribute the sealant in the tire 19 20 21 22 23 Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not Punctured If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi 68 kPa below the recommended inflation pressure stop driving the vehicle The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 10 psi 68 kPa from the recommended inflation pressure inflate the tire to the recommended inf
292. ld washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www toptiergas com 6 6 TOP Gio TIER Detergent Gasoline CATEGORIE Gio SUPERIEURE Essences D tergentes The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 114 If the vehicle has the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 or the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code K you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel E85 85 Ethanol on page 6 9 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 7 Gasoline Octane If the vehicle has the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code B the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code k the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code N or the 3 9L V6 engine VIN Code 1 use regular unleade
293. le can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment Z WARNING Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency 6 35 If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving Idles for long periods in traffic Tows atrailer If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioning off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed O
294. le has the PASS Key IIl Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not start and the security light comes on the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key Also check the fuse See Fuses on page 6 116 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key Ill and have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key IIl decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for programming additional keys on
295. le in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 6 110 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colo
296. le you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 28 2 75 42 NOTES 2 76 Section 3 Features and Controls KEYS oregano sener a a a E i 3 2 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 3 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation isikia asetua aen iEn ERS 3 3 Remote Vehicle Start cceeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeenes 3 5 Doors and Locks l a nenene renerne 3 8 Door LOCKS ssenari e E AAEE ENE 3 8 Power Door LOCKS cicecsasnsicecncieienstiatasassesaienes 3 8 Door Ajar Reminder eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee es 3 9 Delayed LOCKING riores aea a Eai 3 9 Automatic Door Lock eceeeceeeeeeeeeee eee 3 9 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock 3 10 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 10 Lockout Protection 22 255252 ren enkel khaner 3 11 TUNK er tates a E deed estates 3 11 WING OWS 9 25 25 scenes uzpesaccacatenengnacdendaatapsatnncacetde 3 13 Power Windows 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 14 SUN VISONS i225 acter atest ener emianers E EE 3 16 Theft Deterrent Systems ceeeeeeeeee ees 3 16 Content Theft Deterrent ccceeceeeeeeneee tenes 3 16 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 3 18 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Opel alON scares eske an e ae O 3 18 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 3 20 New Vehicle Break In cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeees 3 20 Ignition PoSitiONS soseri
297. ler retailer for service e Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 6 75 Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on 6 69 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle s tires the identification codes need to be matched to the new tire wheel location The sensors are matched to the tire wheel locations in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure When increasing the tire s pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease the tire s air pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage
298. lets at the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle Use of non GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is encountered use the recirculation mode with the temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent the odor from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system This can be helpful when driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation However extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather can cause window fogging 4 24 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there might be or there is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there could be a problem check
299. lid and the side windows Keep people away from these parts when you are lowering or raising the top A WARNING If the retractable hardtop is not completely opened 4 The hardtop switch is located on the headliner or closed the system will cause the retractable hardtop to slowly descend after 3 minutes You or others could be injured The retractable hardtop will descend immediately if the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF during the opening or closing of the retractable hardtop Always completely open or close the retractable hardtop and do not shut off the ignition during the opening or closing of the retractable hardtop To lower the hardtop press and hold the switch until the cycle is complete 3 39 The windows and trunk lid will open The hardtop will automatically lower and the trunk lid will close and latch If the engine is on a chime will sound when the hardtop has lowered completely The Driver Information Center DIC will display TOP MOVE COMPLT See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information 3 40 After the hardtop has lowered completely release the switch If you continue to press the switch for about two seconds after the hardtop has completely lowered the windows will automatically close If pressure is released from the switch before the hardtop cycle is complete the cycle will stop and the Driver Information Center DIC will display the TOP NOT SECURE message Always pres
300. lift the cover the light will turn on Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft deterrent alarm system Arming the System With the ignition off press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock button to arm the system The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are closed or 60 seconds with any door open If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second time while all the doors are closed the system will arm immediately The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a door is open When the open door is closed the system will arm The security light located on the instrument panel cluster comes on to indicate that arming has been initiated Once the system is armed the security light flashes once every three seconds If the security light is flashing twice per second this means that a door is open If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the vehicle the alarm will be activated If you do not want to arm the content theft system lock the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors or with the inside power door lock switches The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if any door is opened while armed Disarming the System To disarm the system do one of the followi
301. ll not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed 2 50 Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat Sedan Models If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat see Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 44 Depending on where you place the child restraint you may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints You cannot secure three child restraints using the LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same time but you can install two of them If you want to do this install one LATCH child restraint in the
302. lowing information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Pontiac remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest you follow Step One first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number o
303. lso be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Rec
304. ly If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new key 1 Verify that the new key has stamped on it 2 Insert the already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of removing the original key The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you are ever driving and the security light comes on and stays on you may be able to restart your engine if you turn it off Your PASS Key III system however is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer retailer Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS Key Ill system at this time If you lose or damage your PASS Key Ill key see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent sys
305. ly See Trunk on page 3 11 for more information TRUNK NOT ALLOW This message will appear when attempting to open the trunk with the ignition on while the retractable hard top is down and stowed in the trunk This is to protect the hardtop against any possible damage The trunk can be opened once the hardtop is raised and secured See Trunk on page 3 11 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information DIC Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to a preferred setting All of the features listed may not be available on your vehicle Only the features available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since that time 4 47 To change feature settings use the following procedure Entering Personalization Menu 1 Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the same time for one second then release to enter the personalization menu If the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km h 2 mph only the UNITS menu will be accessible 3 Press the information button to scroll through the available personalization menu mo
306. ment An Emission Control Service First Engine Oil Change After Every 240 000 km 150 000 Miles Engine cooling system drain flush and refill cooling system and cap pressure check and cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning condenser or every 5 years whichever occurs first See Engine Coolant on page 6 31 An Emission Control Service Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage and replacement if needed An Emission Control Service Scheduled Maintenance 0 Swe Maintenance T Maintenance ml Change engine oil and filter Reset oil life system 0 02 o e Engine coolant level check Windshield washer fluid level check Tire inflation pressures check Tire wear inspection Rotate tires Fluids visual leak check Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles driven in dusty conditions only Brake system inspection Steering and suspension inspection Engine cooling system inspection Windshield wiper blades inspection Body components lubrication Restraint system components check Engine air cleaner filter inspection vehicles not driven in dusty conditions Owner Checks and Services Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check Z WARNING Starter Switch Check Z WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured When you are doing this inspecti
307. ment with the stow bolt going through the center hole of the wheel 7 Turn the spare tire retainer nut until it firmly contacts the wheel Do not over tighten Storing the Spare Tire and Tools Retractable Hardtop Models Follow the previous instructions except turn the jack so the lift arm is parallel to the rear of the vehicle when placing it in the spare tire compartment 6 105 Compact Spare Tire A WARNING Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured Use only one compact spare tire at a time If this vehicle has a compact spare tire it was fully inflated when the vehicle was new however it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on the vehicle stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 6 106 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience Of course it is best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as possible The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take the vehicle through an au
308. mming Transmitters to the Vehicle 3 4 Proposition 65 Warning California 6 5 Pulling As Trailen s missionen iien nanana 5 28 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 2 19 Radio Data System RDS ceeeeeeeeeeee eee 4 55 Radio Frequency Identification RFID nende 8 18 Statement densior in a i a E eae 8 18 Radio Messages cceceeceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 59 Radio S ieoi te a EE 4 54 Radios Recepto pencicah EE 4 83 Setting the ClOCK ainssi oner arenaer 4 53 Theft Deterrent icc ccsaicceencesasssadiacss tasasaeesehesnas 4 81 Raising the Retractable Hardtop 0ee 3 41 Reading Lampshade 4 14 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeee eee ees 3 10 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Sedan and Coupe Only aged erinnern Ras AO ber ER ed ae 2 32 Rear Window Defogger 1 W W W G ssssseeerererrer 4 19 4 23 Rearview Mirrors 535 nn deres 3 34 Automatic DIMMING siro eaaet 3 34 Receiving a Call 22 22502 okser ne enesis 4 78 Reclining Seatbacks W W u sssseeeeeeeeeeeenen ener eeaes 2 7 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 10 Recreational Vehicle Towing eeeeeeeeeees 5 23 Reimbursement Program GM Mobility 8 7 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 0 3 3 Remote Start Ready cceeeceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeaes 3 7 Remote Trunk Release aaneen 3 12 Remote Vehicl
309. mote Vehicle Start on page 3 5 Door Locks Manual Locks Pull up or push down on the manual door lock knob located inside the vehicle on the windowsill to lock or unlock a door See Door Locks on page 3 8 Power Door Locks amp Press the top of the switch to lock both doors Press the bottom of the switch to unlock both doors For more information see e Power Door Locks on page 3 8 Delayed Locking on page 3 9 Automatic Door Lock on page 3 9 Trunk Release In addition to the trunk release button on the RKE transmitter there is a remote release button located on the driver door near the map pocket See Trunk on page 3 11 and Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 Windows On vehicles with power windows the switches are on the driver door armrest The passenger doors have switches that control only that window Press the front of the switch to open the window Pull the switch up to close it For more information see Power Windows on page 3 14 1 6 Seat Adjustment Manual Seats 1 Lift the bar under the seat to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat to be sure it is locked in place See Manual Seats on page 2 4 Power Seats If Equipped Power Reclining Seatbacks If Equipped ram 4 eTo Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the To raise or r
310. mply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 The device may not cause interference 2 The device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment A Accessories and Modifications eeeeeee 6 4 Accessory POWER ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneerenees 3 21 Accessory Power Outlets ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 Adding Washer Fluid ceceeeeeeeeeenee eee eees 6 38 Additional Factors Affecting System Operation 2 71 Additional Program Information 66 8 11 Additional Required Services c sceeeeeeeees 7 4 Additives Fuel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeaeeees 6 8 Add On Electrical Equipment eeeee 6 115 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade 4 58 Air Cleaner Filter Engine c e 6 26 Air Conditioning cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 16 Airbag Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped VONIGIO aineina A AT 2 72 Airbag System How Does an Airbag Restrain eeee 2 65 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeees 2 67 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle
311. n a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys Z WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position WARNING Continued 2 44 WARNING Continued Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 for additional information When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with
312. n Restraints Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmownercenter com pontiac OnStar PRIVACY fossasstactaetsnatencngaisadendcntanidsaaaneins 8 18 OnStar Steering Wheel Controls 0006 1 24 Operation TIPS serene ean En Kbh teenies 4 24 Other Information cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 81 Other Rainy Weather Tips ccceeeeeeneeeeeees 5 13 Outlet Adjustment arasinan ninian 4 24 Outlets Accessory POWER mx eerse eevee ehancnd A 4 15 Outside Convex MINOF Endda 3 36 Power Mirrors 5 is Sair nEn 3 36 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 6 37 Overseas Customer Assistance 8 6 Owner Checks and Services 0 0cceeeeeeeeeees 7 8 Owner Information sensih nerean 8 15 Owners Canadian lt ssc2sc0cssicsecdcotede aE EEATT iii P int Damage sariin itro harinas 6 113 Paing siie E EES 4 72 Parade DIMMING sssecceadsceceteeeeneteccsescnedd i ipii 4 14 Park Headlamps Off in Park cceceeeeeeee sees 4 11 Shifting MIO ease seen met tod needa iaa 3 30 Shifting Out Of derea Aveda sg lead 3 31 Parking Brakes dics cestdenitens ies sh a T E EEE 3 29 Over Things That Burn ccceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 3 32 Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check n se 7 9 Parking On AIS 555 er ind nenea 5 32 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 4 29 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light 4 27 Passenge
313. n on page 3 3 LEARN COMPLETE On vehicles without the Remote Keyless Entry RKE system this message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS has completed the tire learning process See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 66 for more information LOW FUEL This message displays along with a low fuel warning light on the instrument panel cluster when your vehicle is low on fuel Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 4 39 Fuel on page 6 6 and Filling the Tank on page 6 11 LOW TRACTION If your vehicle has the Traction Control System TCS this message displays when the system is actively limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed so adjust your driving accordingly This message stays on for a few seconds after the system stops limiting wheel spin See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 for more information 4 44 LOW WASHER FLUID This message displays when the vehicle s windshield washer fluid is low Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6 38 PARKING BRAKE This message displays if the parking brake is left engaged and you try to drive away See Parking Brake on page 3 29 for more information POWER STEERING This message displays if a problem has been detected with the electric power steering if your vehicle has this featur
314. n pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load Set the cold tire inflation pressure to 35 psi 241 kPa for the front and rear tires when operating your vehicle at high speed conditions When you end high speed driving return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 6 66 Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS
315. n the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 2 46 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint A WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 2 43 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding i
316. nStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week For a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber Information OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar call center when is pressed is pressed or if the airbags or ACR system deploy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the virtual advisor feature of OnStar hands free calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satell
317. nce and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions 6 109 Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 6 110 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehic
318. nce coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved
319. nd The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3 34 Steering Wheel Adjustment The lever is located on the left side of the steering wheel column To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever down 2 Move the steering wheel up or down or backward or forward into a comfortable position 3 Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place See Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 4 3 Interior Lighting Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened They turn off after all the doors are closed To turn the dome lamps on manually turn the instrument panel brightness knob located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column clockwise to the farthest position The dome lamps will remain on whether a door is opened or closed Reading Lamps The front reading lamps are located in the front overhead console The rear reading lamps are near the dome lamp overhead near the rear passenger seats For vehicles with front and rear reading lamps press the lens to turn the lamp on and off while the doors are closed These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened For more information on interior lighting see Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 13 Entry Exit Lighting on page 4 13 Parade Dimming on page 4 14 Exterior Lighting Windshield Wiper Wa
320. nd connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone press for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing lt phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions 4 80 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with S
321. ners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A WARNING You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 15 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 72 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 7 14 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshie
322. ng Press the RKE transmitter unlock button Turn the ignition to ON RUN Once the system is disarmed the security light will stop flashing How the System Alarm is Activated To activate the system if it is armed Open the driver s door or trunk A ten second pre alarm chirp will sound followed by a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights Open any other door A full alarm of horn and lights will immediately sound for thirty seconds Open the hood If the vehicle has the remote start feature it will activate the full alarm When an alarm event has finished the system will re arm itself automatically How to Turn Off the System Alarm To turn off the system alarm Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter The system will then re arm itself Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter This will also disarm the system Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on This will also disarm the system 3 17 How to Detect a Tamper Condition If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button is pressed on the RKE transmitter it means that the content theft security system alarm was previously triggered PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and RSS 210 211 of Industry and Science Canada PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehic
323. ng and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered Using the Digit Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Digit Dial The system responds with Digit dial using lt phone name gt please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using lt phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone 4 77 3 Say the name tag of the person to call e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name
324. nger work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOW message displays in the DIC See KEY FOB BATT LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing up Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle It may also start the vehicle s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger When the remote start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic climate control system it will automatically regulate the inside temperature Normal operation of the system will return after the ignition key is turned to ON RUN Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of veh
325. nlock feedback can be programmed to have the horn chirp and or the turn signals flash to confirm unlocking See UNLOCK HORN and LIGHT FLASH under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 The high beam headlamps parking lamps and back up lamps may turn on when A is pressed See EXT Exterior LIGHTS under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 3 16 3 4 s Remote Trunk Release Press and hold for approximately one second to open the trunk The trunk will open using the transmitter when the vehicle speed is less than 3 km h 2 mph when the ignition is off or when the vehicle shift lever is in P Park 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press to locate the vehicle The horn sounds three times and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times Press and hold 2 for approximately three seconds to sound the panic alarm The horn sounds and the headlamps and turn signals flash for 30 seconds Press 3 again to cancel the panic alarm Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be programmed Any lost or stolen transmitters no lo
326. nning with Step 2 Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 74 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It ls Time for New Tires on page 6 74 and Wheel Replacement on page 6 79 When rotating the vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 6 73 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 67 Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightene
327. ntenna 2 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 84 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 FlaSh tO P SS cccccccececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenenes 4 5 Flat TUS ai ea a acca inccsnecesdn 6 81 Flat Tire Changing 2 202 820 ueetds n ne nia 6 90 Flat Tires Stoning vas iess near eres pew sacs 6 99 Fluid Automatic Transmission 20ceeeeee 6 27 6 28 Power Steering cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eee een ees 6 37 Windshield Washer eceeeeeeeeeenee eee eees 6 38 NES ETT se AE acca ang tecareteiee EAS 4 83 Er SIE EAEN ES AIETE AE Ae nei SS es 6 60 Fog Lamps Bulb Replacement eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 12 Folding the Seatback cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 13 Following Distance cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ens 5 31 FONMAL ennnen E E A iets 4 63 FUSI arreire E T 6 6 AJAV S seanar eaa E a 6 8 Galifornia Fuel seirian ressonar 6 7 E85 85 Ethanol rarere esterne 6 9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 0 6 13 Filling the Tank vaca er a 6 11 Fuels in Foreign Countries eeeeeeeeeees 6 11 GAG E E E anunnayseneceati 4 38 Gasoline Octane cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 6 7 Gasoline Specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 7 Low Fuel Warning Light eeeeeeee neers 4 39 Fuel Economy Driving for Better ca saa renees 1 21 FUSES aeree oeei ree rare Less 6 116 Engine Compartment Fu
328. ntified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature Operation If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information 6 23 Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed 6 24 When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished
329. nue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The antilock pump or motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal might be felt to pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Electronic Stability Control ESC The vehicle has an Electronic Stability Control system called StabiliTrak which combines antilock brake traction and stability control systems and helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving conditi
330. ock is located in the trunk of the vehicle Access the fuse block through the trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area 00 00 HO sea 708 cD g Fb e als pa Rear Quarter Windows Retractable Hardtop ee Hardtop Only Not Used Driver Seat Controls je Cancion er cena 6 123 Park Lamps Instrument Panel Dimming a S XM Satellite Radio 20 Cigarette Lighter Auxiliary Power Outlet Trunk Release 6 124 Fuses Ure Rear Defog res e 25 Rear Window Detogser ar iain TT haves CS S a0 _ notusea CS E a2 haves CS C s frais a 5 fhawes 5 fru rese ran CS 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 iode Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 for more information For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer retailer for more information Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Automatic Transmission Automatic 4 Speed 4T65 Transmission 70L Bottom Pan Removal i Automatic 4 Speed 4T45 Transmission 6 6L Bottom Pan Removal Automatic 6 Speed 6T40 Transmission Drain and Refill Automatic 6 Speed 6T70 Transmission Drain and Refill 6 125 Application mm 3 6L V6 Engine 5 2L 5 5 qt Fuel Tank 61 7L 16 3 gal Wheel N
331. oling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature 3 6L V6 Engine shown 2 4L L4 3 5L 3 9L Engines similar A Engine Cooling Fans B Engine Coolant Surge Tank C Pressure Cap A WARNING An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Z WARNING Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 50 000 km 30 000 miles or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant The coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 240 000 km 150 000 miles whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to check and
332. ollowing order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename is not displayed Preprogrammed Playlists CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however there is no playlist editing capability using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playlists that have an m3u or pls file extension and
333. olonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 www gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program E MOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 ROADSIDE 762 3743 Text telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purc
334. om the rear with all four wheels on the ground 5 25 Dolly Towing From the Front Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground and the front wheels on a dolly To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and a dolly Put the front wheels on a dolly Put the gear shift lever in P Park Set the parking brake Po BN Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing 5 26 5 Remove the key from the ignition 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly 7 Release the parking brake Dolly Towing From the Rear Notice Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it Also repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never have the vehicle towed from the rear Do not tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on a dolly Towing a Trailer A WARNING The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly
335. on the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a room around the vehicle level surface 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake brake See Parking Brake on page 3 29 on page 3 29 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if turn off the engine immediately if it starts the vehicle begins to move 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the but do not start the engine Without applying the vehicle starts in any other position contact regular brake try to move the shift lever out your dealer retailer for service of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing i downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn parking brake he igniti L i i ition the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position To check the parking brakes holding ability With e The ignition should turn to LOCK
336. on Off Light rd OFF The light comes on when the Traction Control System TCS has been turned off by pressing and releasing the TCS ESC button This light also comes on along with a DIC message if there is a problem with the traction control system See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 for more information See DIC for more information Electronic Stability Control Indicator Light The Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator light comes on while the system is controlling the vehicle ee For more information see Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 4 32 Electronic Stability Control Indicator Warning OFF Light The Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Warning OFF light comes on when ESC system is turned off ee OFF The system can be turned off by pressing and holding the Traction ESC control button This light along with the appropriate Driver Information Center DIC messages indicates when the ESC system is turned off The ESC OFF light also comes on when there is a problem with the ESC system and the vehicle needs service Check the DIC messages to determine if the light is ON because ESC is switched OFF or if there is a fault with the ESC system For more information see Driver Information Center DIC on page 4 39 For more information see Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This l
337. ons StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction This light comes on when StabiliTrak is activated ee When you first start the vehicle and begin to drive away the system performs several diagnostic checks to ensure there are no problems The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle This light comes on if there is a problem with the system or the system Pe has been turned off StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle is started To help assist with directional control of the vehicle the system should always be left on The Traction Control System TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned off if needed by pressing and holding the TCS ESC button until the StabiliTrak TCS Off light comes on Press the button again to turn StabiliTrak and Traction Control back on See Traction Control System TCS following for more information If cruise control is being used when the system activates cruise control will automatically disengage Press the cruise control button to reengage when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 4 7 for more information Traction Control System TCS The vehicle ha
338. or a key You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel position If it takes longer than two minutes to match any tire and wheel position the matching process stops and you need to start over 6 70 TPMS Matching Process for Vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry RKE 1 2 Set the parking brake Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s lock and unlock buttons at the same time for about five seconds to start the TPMS learn mode The horn sounds twice indicating the TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode Start with the driver side front tire The driver side front turn signal also comes on to indicate that corner s sensor is ready to be learned Remove the valve cap from the tire s valve stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for about eight seconds The horn chirp can take up to 30 seconds to sound It chirps one time and then all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the sensor identification code has been matched to the tire wheel position 10 11 The passenger side front turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned Proceed to the passenger side rear tire
339. ost This modes clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly The system automatically controls the fan speed if AUTO mode is selected If the outside temperature is 4 C 40 F or warmer the air conditioning compressor automatically runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield The air conditioning indicator light blinks three times if you try to turn off the compressor while in this mode eS Outside Air Press the right side of the button to turn the outside air mode on An indicator light comes on to show that it is on Air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle The outside air mode can be used with all modes except the recirculation mode Press XY again to cancel the recirculation mode 4 22 CS Recirculation Press the left side of the button to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light above the button comes on to show that it is on The air inside the vehicle is recirculated through the climate control system and throughout the vehicle not from outside This helps to limit the odors entering the vehicle and maximize air conditioning performance The recirculation mode cannot be used while in defrost defog or floor mode If recirculation is selected while in these modes the indicator light flashes three times to let you know that it is not allowed Use this mode only when it is needed for comfort since window fogging occurs if the air conditioning compressor is not engaged
340. ost states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 2 16 Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider The person keeps going until stopped by something does not stop In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious
341. ot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A WARNING When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention 2 66 The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn off the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features A WARNING A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle such as the fuel system brake and steering systems etc Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle Use caution if you should attempt to restart th
342. ould be worn over the shoulder at all times A WARNING You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 2 25 Q What is wrong with this A WARNING You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest A The belt is behind the body 2 26 Q What is wrong with this AWARNING You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it The belt is twisted across the body Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap
343. ounded end of the nuts toward the wheel Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub Z WARNING Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 13 Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Lower the jack completely 6 97 14 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown with the wheel wrench A WARNING Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications 6 98 Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 for the wheel nut torque specification Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare tire It will not fit Notice Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle s compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare the cover or the spare could be damage
344. overloading Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on Premature or irregular wear an individual tire due to curb weight accessory e Poor handling weight occupant weight and cargo weight Reduced fuel economy Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached If your tires have too much air over inflation to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity you can get the following weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Unusual wear Loading Information Label under Loading the Poor handling Vehicle on page 5 18 Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 6 64 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire it should be at 60
345. p tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A ora dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 2 47 Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Rear Seat Coupe 2 48 li Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors li Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower zx DE _ Rear Seat Retractable Hardtop To assist you in locating the lower anchors each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion
346. p the vehicle in good working condition improves fuel economy and reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality Because of all the different ways people use vehicles maintenance needs vary The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance To keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 6 7 A WARNING Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 6 5 At your General Motors dealer retailer you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available Your dealer retailer has specially trained service technicians uses genuine GM replacement parts as well as up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are list
347. page 4 42 for more information The hardtop will not operate if the vehicle has an electrical failure If an electrical failure occurs see your dealer retailer for service If your vehicle must be towed to a dealer retailer for service your vehicle should be towed by flatbed with the vehicle facing backwards Consult your dealer retailer or professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 3 43 42 NOTES 3 44 Section 4 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview 666ee 4 3 Trunk lampessi 4 14 Hazard Warning Flashers ceseeceeeeeees 4 3 Electric Power Management icce 4 14 Fe Maca serne nere teas tees taeda 4 3 Battery Run Down Protection sne 4 15 Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel 4 3 Accessory Power Outlet S ceeeeeeeeeeees 4 15 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 2 4 4 Climate Controls ss 4 16 Turn and Lane Change Signals 4 4 Climate Control System ccccsecccceeeeeee 4 16 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 4 5 Automatic Climate Control System 06 4 20 Flash to Pass ccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeenes 4 5 Outlet Adjustment cc cccecceusescesercswecsensseeene 4 24 Windshield Wipers cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 y Windshield Washer scceeetseeeereeee 4 6 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 424
348. page 7 3 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for the location of the engine air cleaner filter 6 26 af Ww PP Lift the two latches straight up or remove the screws Disconnect the electrical connector Lift off the cover Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover and reconnect the electrical connector A WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take your vehicle to the dealer retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the flui
349. passenger side position and install the other one either in the driver s side position or in the center position Refer to the following illustration to learn which anchors to use Sedan A Passenger s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors B Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors C Drivers Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper anchor location 2 51 This system is designed to make installation of child restraints easier When using lower anchors do not use the vehicle s safety belts Instead use the vehicle s anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether Sedan Coupe and Retractable Hardtop Models 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 2 52 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if equipped
350. pen the windows as necessary 3 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in N Neutral while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to P Park or N Neutral and let the engine idle 6 36 If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode next in this section Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation If an overheated engine condition exists an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode there is a significant loss in power and engine performance The temperature gage indicates an overheat condition exists Driving extended distances and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid en
351. personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal e How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed
352. plamps and Back up Lamps 1 Retractable Hardtop 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A Sidemarker Lamp B Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp C Back up Lamp Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 Locate the three rubber covers in the trunk trim near the taillamp assembly and remove them Remove the two nuts and one bolt retaining the taillamp assembly Pull off the taillamp assembly to the side to release it from the vehicle Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove Pull the bulb from the bulb socket Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall Push the taillamp assembly back into place Reinstall the two nuts and one bolt retaining the taillamp assembly Reinstall the trunk trim and three rubber covers License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs To replace the license plate lamp bulb Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Coupe and Retractable 921 Hardtop 3057K Center High Mounted Stoplamp 912 CHMSL Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Amber Lens 3157KX Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp Crystal Lens 3157AK Front Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194 License Plate Lamp 168 Headlamps 1 Remove the license plate assembly by turning the High Beam Lamp H9 two screws counterclockwise Low Beam Lamp H11 2 Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward Stoplamp Taillamp and Turn 3057K through the fascia opening Signal Lamp 3
353. pper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank might be lower If the level is lower than the FULL COLD mark add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark 5 Replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight and fully seated Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank Engine Overheating The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine overheating There is an engine coolant temperature gage on the instrument panel cluster See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 4 33 You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 7 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice If the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehic
354. ps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P PARK or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake 6 43 Notice If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet Turn off the radio and all lamps that ar
355. ps imas enn anae nE a 4 14 Turn and Lane Change Signals 0 eeeeeeees 4 4 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever cceeeeeeeeee ee 4 4 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer 5 5 32 2 Second 3 Third Gear Start Feature 3 28 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ccecce 6 78 United States Customer Assistance 8 6 Used Replacement Wheels aoinne 6 80 Using ABS ie siarane cana cs EE 5 5 Using Softkeys to Control a USB Storage Device OF IP OO EL ueser A teen Reed 4 68 Using the Auxiliary Input Jack ccce 4 62 Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or IP OG ssis nanna ninani a 4 67 Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire 6 84 Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire Not PUNMCUUROG siciccsciicsdsenpieeeesanancancis SEE Read 6 87 Using the USB Port cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 63 Vehicle COMMON tereso state ona aaeentincas 5 3 EOAGING E en dane beara 5 18 Remote Start 3522247 insert et 3 5 Running While Parked seeeeeeeeeeeees 3 33 SYMDOINS oo sas Ea re aan a a aE iv Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 8 16 Vehicle Identification Number VIN randen ar 6 114 Service Parts Identification Label 6 115 Vehicle Personalization DIO ase tira sche ce sets eect eases tenn gee tedsnecteetene 4 47 Vehicle Storage
356. r 3 Third gear The vehicle will start from a stop position in 2 Second or 3 Third gear 3 Once the vehicle is moving select the desired drive gear Parking Brake To release the parking brake 1 Hold the brake pedal down 2 Pull the parking brake handle up until you can press the release button 3 Hold the release button in as you move the brake handle all the way down Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving If you are towing a trailer and you are parking on a hill see Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 GT and GTP Shown SE Similar To set the parking brake pull up on the parking brake handle If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 30 3 29 Shifting Into Park Automatic Transmission A WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 Use this procedure to shift into P Park
357. r Sensing System eeeeeeeeee eres 2 67 PASSING crsn cect eaan a a E 5 10 5 31 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 3 18 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer Operation oo cneldsetaserdveeecopiaaccthaieeaeiaeneeads 3 18 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 6 5 Personalization Menu Modes scce 4 48 Phone Bluetooth S eaei as iiia denia 4 71 Playing a CD onina ea e e 4 60 Playing a CD R or CD RW MP3 nsec 4 65 Playing an MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc 4 61 Playing the Radio 252 nen leads ts ceeded pens 4 55 Power Dogr LOCKS erinin a aa SE 3 8 Electrical System 0 eceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 6 115 Litt SCAU cet ccstestant ke E Eee EDER GER 2 12 Lumbar Controls 0 ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 5 Retained Accessory RAP nccc 3 21 DO ab A E E E 2 5 Steering Fluid rare alanere 6 37 WINGOWS senis oone e ripae eE SENE 3 14 Power Door LOCKS sisenta Eni 1 5 12 Power Reclining Seatbacks s ssessserrererernrene 2 8 Power Window Initialize Coupe and Retractable Hardtop scenerne ere 3 15 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts eeeee 2 35 PHIVAGCY 553 ra ke rer n arne bede 8 16 Navigation System 24 erne cntie 8 18 ORSA easa ed e een orn E aE aE 8 18 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 8 18 Program Courtesy Transportation cceeeeeeeneee tenes 8 10 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock 3 10 Progra
358. r accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 6 4 for more information Steering Electric Power Steering If the vehicle has the electric power steering system and the engine stalls while driving the power steering assist system will continue to operate until you are able to stop the vehicle If power steering assist is lost because the electric power steering system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several times until it stops or hold the steering wheel in the stopped position for an extended amount of time you may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist The normal amount of power steering assist should return shortly after a few normal steering movements The electric power steering system does not require regular maintenance If you suspect steering system problems contact your dealer retailer for service repairs See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Hydraulic Power Steering If the vehicle has the hydraulic power steering system and power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve
359. r more information on location 2 Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel 3 Reinstall it back in all the way wait three seconds and then pull it back out again ROD 1 PT5 RRRS 4 Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level The fluid level must be within the crosshatched area 5 If the fluid level is in the acceptable range reinstall the dipstick back in all the way 6 29 How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 If the fluid level is low add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick 1 Remove the dipstick 2 Using a long neck funnel add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level It does not take much fluid generally less than a half pint 0 24 L Do not overfill Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 10 3 After adding fluid recheck the fluid level as described under How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid earlier in this section 4 When the correct fluid level is obtained reinstall the dipstick back in all the way 6 30 Co
360. r retailer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle for the best advice in this 3 23 Automatic Transmission Operation P Park This position locks the front wheels It is the best position to use when starting the engine because The vehicle will have one of these styles of shifter the vehicle cannot move easily located in the center console between the seats Z WARNING It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll 0000 Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park Automatic Transmission on page 3 30 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 00000 0000 Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must apply the regular brake first then press the shift lever i button before shifting from P Park while the ignition key is in ON RUN If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P Par
361. r the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits 8 14 Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of C
362. r write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 www dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in this program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in approximately 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP
363. re or tire chain right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors clearance to the body and chassis for your vehicle See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 90 for more information AWARNING Used Replacement Wheels Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous A WARNING It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous lose control You could have a collision in which You cannot know how it has been used or how far it you or others could be injured Always use the has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new replacement GM original equipment wheel 6 80 Tire Chains A WARNING Do not use tire chains there is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly re adjust or remove the device if is contacting
364. recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6 73 for information on proper tire rotation A WARNING Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily as it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 6 106 6 76 A WARNING If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give
365. red After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted To return the seatback to the upright position push up the seatback Then pull on the seatback to make sure it is secure Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts A WARNING Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too A WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 27 for additional information In m
366. red basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts 6 111 Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean th
367. requency DTMF Tones 4 80 E85 PUGH decadsencteeacs ae E T E 6 9 Easy Entry Seat scincencsetctsdeasercamenibesnentwcmaeades 2 11 EDR a icivexesleorersalvirtaesniueeet AN RTEA Na 8 16 Ejectingra CD rohea rA 4 60 Electric Power Steering ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeee es 5 8 Electrical Equipment Add On 02 0000 6 115 Electrical System Engine Compartment Fuse Block 6 119 F SES ieni e a a 6 116 Instrument Panel Fuse Block u s 6 116 Power Windows and Other Power Options 6 115 Rear Compartment Fuse Block 55 6 122 Windshield Wiper Fuses seeseeeeeee es 6 115 Electrical System cont Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key Ul oo cc ore banerne rele 3 18 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key le oo cccccccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Electronic Stability Control ccceeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 5 Electronic Stability Control Indicator Warning OFF Bid Ar rr reen eres 4 32 Emergency Trunk Release Handle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 12 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs sorserien Erde beer ees 4 36 Ending a Call piber eee Ed gede drer 4 79 Engine Air Cleaner Filter cccceeceeeeeneeeeeneeeeenes 6 26 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 4 34 Compartment Overview 6 16 COON AE A A eee see asada 6 31 Coolant Heater ccceceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeenes 3 23 Coolant Temperature Gage
368. riginal storage location in the vehicle Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister Remove the plastic cover Unscrew the connector B from the canister A Pull up on the canister A to remove it Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer retailer Push the new canister into place Screw the connector B to the canister A 7 Slide the plastic cover back on AUN O 01 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the trunk 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 2 Lift the cover 3 Turn the retainer clockwise and remove the tire sealant and compressor kit To store the tire sealant and compressor kit reverse the steps Changing a Flat Tire 7 WARNING Continued If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers Turn off the engine and do not restart while on page 4 3 the vehicle is raised Z WARNING Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farth
369. rn on using the last settings selected on the climate control before the vehicle was turned off The fan and air delivery knobs can be used during remote start The buttons will not work until the ignition is turned on by the key The climate control system changes back to manual operation when the vehicle key is turned to ON RUN Automatic Climate Control System If the vehicle has this system the heating cooling and ventilation can be automatically controlled in the vehicle A Fan Control F Air Delivery Mode B Air Conditioning Control C Recirculation G Display D Outside Air H Temperature E Rear Window Control Defogger Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic Select AUTO on both the fan speed control and the air delivery mode control knobs to activate the automatic system Automatic operation controls the inside temperature and air delivery 4 20 Use the steps below to place the climate control system in automatic mode 1 Turn the fan knob and the air delivery mode knob to AUTO The display shows the current set temperature When auto is selected the air conditioning operation and air inlet is automatically controlled The air conditioning compressor runs when the outside temperature is over about 4 C 40 F The air inlet is normally set to outside air If it is hot outside the air inlet can automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help quickly cool down t
370. rt Using an MP3 Format Radios that have the capability of playing MP3 s can play mp3 or wma files that were recorded onto a CD R or CD RW disc Radios that have a USB port can play mp3 and wma files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod Compressed Audio The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files If both formats are on the disc the radio reads all MP3 files first then the uncompressed CD audio files 4 63 CD R or CD RW Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports Up to 50 folders Up to 8 folders in depth Up to 50 playlists Up to 255 files Playlists with an m3u or wpl extension Files with an mp3 wma or cda file extension USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports Up to 700 folders Up to 8 folders in depth Up to 65 535 files Folder and file names up to 64 bytes Files with an mp3 or wma file extension AAC files stored on an iPod FAT16 FAT32 4 64 Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder Files are stored in the root directory when the disc or storage device does not contain folders Files accessed from the root directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped and the player advances to the next folder that contains files Order of Play Tracks are played in the f
371. s Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See nflation Tire Pressure on page 6 64 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are la
372. s always leave the system turned on TCS can be turned off if needed To turn the system on or off press the TCS ESC button located below TC the climate controls It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand mud ice or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it See f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 5 17 If the TCS ESC button is pressed once the traction control system turns off and the traction off light comes on The Electronic Stability Control ESC system called StabiliTrak stays on Press the TCS ESC button again to turn the system back on The traction off light will go off The Traction Control System TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned off if needed by pressing and holding the TCS ESC button until the StabiliTrak TCS Off light comes on Press the TCS ESC button again to turn StabiliTrak and the traction control system back on For more information see Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 When the system is off the traction off light will come on and stay on If the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin and the button is pressed to turn the system off the traction off light will come on and the system will stop limiting wheel spin The system will not provide traction assistance until the system is turned back on Adding non dealer non retaile
373. s door open the following will occur Three chimes will sound to signal the delay All doors will lock and the turn signals will flash once five seconds after the last door has been closed The horn will chirp if the horn chirp feature is enabled See DIC Operation and Displays on page 4 40 If a door is opened before the five seconds has ended the doors will not lock until five seconds after all doors are closed If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle the doors will lock immediately If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock button is pressed the doors will unlock immediately and do not lock automatically after the doors are closed This feature is turned on at the factory but may be turned off through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 4 47 Automatic Door Lock Your vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock all doors automatically when the following are met All doors are closed The ignition is on The shift lever is moved out of P Park This feature cannot be disabled If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are locked have that person use the manual lock knob or power door unlock switch Programmable Automatic Door Unlock Your vehicle was programmed at the factory to unlock when the shift lever is moved to P Park You can change the settings of the pro
374. s recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Replacement Bulbs on page 6 54 For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer retailer Halogen Bulbs A WARNING Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package 6 47 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps A Front Sidemarker C Low Beam B Front Turn Signal Headlamp Parking Lamp D High Beam Headlamp 2 o 6 48 To replace one of these bulbs 1 Remove the two screws that secure the headlamp assembly Remove the fasteners of the front facia by lifting under them Pull the front facia back and then pull the headlamp assembly out of the vehicle Assistance may be needed with this step to avoid possible damage to the vehicle Pull the headlamp assembly away from the fender to release the ball stud from the retainer in the fender bracket 11 12 13 Remove the bulb access cover by turning it counterclockwise Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out the bulb assembly Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiring harness for headlamps For the front turn signal parking or sidemarker bulbs unclip the bulb from the socket
375. s a Traction Control System TCS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin Also the traction control system activates the appropriate corner brakes to gain even quicker control to limit wheel spin The system may be heard or felt while it is working but this is normal If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage Press the cruise control button to reengage when road conditions allow See Cruise Control on page 4 7 for more information TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions except park or neutral But the system can upshift the transmission only as high as the shift lever position that is chosen so use the lower gears only when necessary See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3 24 The traction off light is located on the instrument r c panel cluster OFF This light comes on if there is a problem with the system or if the system has been turned off When this warning light is on the system will not limit wheel spin Adjust your driving accordingly TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is started To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road condition
376. s and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 2 73 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 27 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 6 110 2 74 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4 28 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers h
377. s and hold the switch until a chime sounds if the engine is on and the Driver Information Center DIC displays the TOP MOVE COMPLT to signal the procedure is complete See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information When the retractable hardtop is down and stowed in the trunk the trunk open function will be disabled When the ignition is on the TRUNK NOT ALLOW message will be displayed on the DIC when attempting to open the trunk with the retractable hardtop stowed inside See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Raising the Retractable Hardtop 1 Park on a level surface and shift the transmission A WARNING into P Park The vehicle must be in P Park and the engine must be running or the ignition When the retractable hardtop is opened or closed turned to the ON RUN position to operate the retractable hardtop people can be injured by the parts that move the hardtop and its mechanism the trunk lid and the side windows Keep people away from these parts when you are lowering or raising the top A WARNING If the retractable hardtop is not completely opened or closed the system will cause the retractable hardtop to slowly descend after 3 minutes You or others could be injured The retractable hardtop will descend immediately if the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF during the opening or closing of the retractable hardtop Always completely open or 2 The trunk cargo cover
378. s are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints 2 41 Child Restraint Systems A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness 2 42 A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle A WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured i
379. s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 67 for additional information If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 2 Put the child restraint on the seat If the seat has a safety belt guide remove the safety belt from the guide on the head restraint by sliding the webb
380. s door will automatically unlock NONE None of the doors will automatically unlock You will need to manually unlock the doors See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 3 10 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC UNLK Unlock This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected for the AUTO UNLK feature This feature determines when the automatic door unlocking will occur When UNLK appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings KEY OFF The door s will unlock when the key is turned off SHIFT TO P Park default The door s will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock on page 3 10 for more information To select a setting and move on to the next feature press the information button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 4 51 EXT Exterior LIGHTS This feature which allows the vehicle s exterior perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed can be enabled or disabled When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display press and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll through the available settings OFF The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on when the unlock button on t
381. s information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 18 for FCC information Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle 4 81 Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle s options Some audio controls can AN 4 be adjusted at the steering wheel lt Volume Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume NI V Next Previous Press to change radio stations select tracks on a CD or to select tracks and navigate folders on an iPod or USB device To change radio stations Press and release or V to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset Press and hold A or V to go to the next or previous radio station in the selected band with a strong signal 4 82 To select tracks on a CD Press and release A or V to go to the next or previous track To select tracks on an iPod or USB device 1 Press and hold A or V w
382. safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 72 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such as airbag initiators seat belt pretensio
383. se Block 6 119 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ccecce 6 116 Rear Compartment Fuse Block 055 6 122 Windshield Wiper 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 115 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 4 33 Fuel syrtdivnnrteetesgiee ec nE EEEE 4 38 Speedometer ccceceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 TACHOMETER celinda e EE 4 26 Trip Odometer sisir niina saena aen 4 26 Gasoline Ote ale E E E E 6 7 Specifications c cee eeceececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 7 Glove BOX scenerne serene i re ere AE 3 37 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 1W 1 1 1 8 7 Halogen Bulbs eici bictatii de ees 6 47 Hazard Warning Flashers iecere 4 3 Head Restraint sesiscenctetakacedieneinsnderist aatinaa 2 2 Headlamps i2sigasinatenee reen ended 4 10 AMING pesses teams ane aan aa 6 47 Bulb Replacement ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 47 Daytime Running Lamps DRL ccecce 4 11 DENSO MT erkender 4 11 Flash to Pass iue aae N E AN 4 5 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps iiisirsinensnianeinisiissins 6 48 High Low Beam Changer eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 5 On Reminder cccceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeenes 4 10 Headlamps Off in Park eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 4 11 Heated Seats W W u seseeeerereree eee eeaeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeee 2 6 Heater usa ni En naaede 4 16 Engine Coolant wi i ccescnotspesacinehessaccetanal tases 3 23 Highbeam
384. se glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer 6 107 Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces e Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is
385. se the engine coolant heater if the vehicle has one to quickly provide warmer air An engine coolant heater warms coolant that the engine uses to warm the inside of the vehicle For more information see Engine Coolant Heater on page 3 23 Air Delivery Mode Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the air delivery settings Select from the following modes pe Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets Wi Bi Level Air is divided between the air to the instrument panel and floor outlets Some air may be directed toward the side windows ted Floor Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the side window outlets and windshield a Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield and floor outlets with some air directed to the side windows When this mode is selected the system automatically turns off recirculation and tuns the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing The air conditioning compressor operates although the indicator light is not on The air conditioning indicator light turns off when defog is selected If the air conditioning button is pressed while in defog mode the indicator light turns on If the button is pressed again the light turns off The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear OY
386. sed on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter The oil life system should be reset to 100 only following an oil change Resetting the Oil Life System 1 Turn the ignition to ON RUN with the engine off 2 With the CHANGE OIL SOON message displayed press any of the three DIC buttons to clear the CHANGE OIL SOON message 3 Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC 4 Press and hold the ENTER button for at least one second An ACKNOWLEDGED display message will appear for three seconds or until the next button is pressed This tells you the system has been reset 5 Turn the key to LOCK OFF See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 24 1 20 Fuel E85 85 Ethanol The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 6 114 If the vehicle has the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 or the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code K you can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85 ethanol E85 See Fuel on page 6 6 In all other engines use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 6 7 Only vehicles that have the 2 4L L4 engine VIN Code 0 or the 3 5L V6 engine VIN Code K can use 85 ethanol fuel E85 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it
387. setseseessessensnesereneaens 3 2 Fusik EN kegler 6 6 Doors and LOCKS 3537 esser sa her ER 3 8 Checking Things Under WINDOWS EEN ed ede 3 13 the Hood aan antes Neda dae 6 14 Theft Deterrent Systems 1 3 16 Headlamp Aiming user alene 6 47 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 3 20 Bulb Replacement W W W sssssseseeeeeeeeeerekee 6 47 MIMGONS jcc en ccnctstabucatt a a Aaeeskinckedeten 3 34 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 6 55 Maintenance Schedule s0eeteeeeeeeeees 7 1 UT SNS E eee EEN ERE eae 6 56 Maintenance Schedule succesen kb elbeens 7 2 Appearance Care GW G sssssseneeeeeeeener ener rener 6 107 Customer Assistance Information 8 1 Vehicle Identification oe cece eeeeeee sees 6 114 Customer Assistance and Information _ 8 2 Electrical System tvsicesseivevseeicvedevewsevcce cas 6 115 Reporting Safety Defects eee 8 14 Capacities and Specifications 6 125 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 8 16 WGK EEE E P E E EE E EE A 1 Y PONTIAC GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem PONTIAC the PONTIAC Emblem and the name G6 are registered trademarks of General Motors This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual Please refer to the purchase document
388. sher O Turn the band to this position to turn on the Automatic Headlamp System In Canada this position only works when a vehicle is in the P Park position AUTO Automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps DRL during the daytime and the headlamps parking lamps and taillamps at night 500 Manual operation of the parking lamps and taillamps ZD Manual operation of the headlamps parking lamps and taillamps For more information see Headlamps on page 4 10 The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of the steering column O Turns the wipers off SY Turn band for intermittent or speed sensitive operation As vehicle speed increases or decreases the wiper interval also increases or decreases lt Q Delays wiping cycle GER Slow wipes DD Fast wipes g Use for a single wiping cycle Windshield Washer Press the button at the end of the Automatic Climate Control System If Equipped lever until the washers begin See Windshield Wipers on page 4 5 and Windshield Washer on page 4 6 Climate Controls Climate Control System A Fan Control E Rear Window Defogger B Air Conditioning F Air Delivery Mode Control C Air Recirculation G Display D Outside Air H Temperature Control See Climate Control System on page 4 16 or Automatic A Fan Control E Air Delivery Mode Climate Control System on page 4 20 B Air Recircu
389. shoulder belt The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 If the seat has a safety belt guide and the safety belt is not routed through the guide slide the edge of the belt webbing through the opening on the guide Be sure the belt is not twisted 2 28 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the way and start again 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 35 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt I
390. signate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road
391. space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A WARNING Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive t
392. straints are not designed to be removed Front Seats Manual Seats A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving If the vehicle has a manual seat it can be moved forward or rearward 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Power Seats If the vehicle has power seats the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats To adjust the seat Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down Power Lumbar On seats with power lumbar the control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the front of the control A to increase lumbar support Press the rear of the control B to decrease lumbar support Heated Seats Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat setting The indicator light 1 will be lit Press th
393. sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge 4 61 Care of the CD Player Do not add labels to a CD it could get caught in the CD player Use a marking pen to write on the top of the CD if a description is needed Do not use CD lens cleaners they could damage the CD player Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages earlier in this section Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system may have an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack An external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source 4 62 Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 5 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 in cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press t
394. t applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every time the brakes are applied with or without the vehicle moving the brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replaced for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake par
395. t each time the softkey is pressed Third softkey 5 through the list each time the softkey is pressed Fourth softkey 10 through the list each time the softkey is pressed Fifth softkey end of the list Repeat Functionality To use Repeat Press the softkey below or 1 to select between Repeat All and Repeat Track gt Repeat All Press the softkey below amp to repeat all tracks The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected 1 Repeat Track Press the softkey below 21 to repeat one track The tab appears raised when Repeat Track is being used 4 69 Shuffle Functionality To use Shuffle Press the softkey below gt DGS DCA or DCF to select between Shuffle Off Shuffle All Songs Shuffle Songs Shuffle Album or Shuffle Folder gt Shuffle Off Press the softkey below CS to turn shuffle off This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected DGS Shuffle All Songs Shuffle Songs Press the softkey below DGF or DGA to shuffle all songs on the USB storage device or iPod DCA Shuffle Album Press the softkey below gt to shuffle all songs in the current aloum on an iPod DCF Shuffle Folder Press the softkey below gt to shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage device 4 70 XM Radio Messages XL Explicit Language Channels These channels
396. t may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 2 29 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should return to its stowed position Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop on the side wall 2 30 If the vehicle has a retractable hardtop secure the safety belt latch plate when the safety belt is not in use in the rear seat To do this slide the safety belt webbing D behind the belt webbing retaining clip B and slide the latch A into the latch retaining clip C Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Sedan Only The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but not falling off the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Push down the release button A and move the A height adjuster to the desired position The adjuster can be moved up by pushing the release
397. t of the cover to open the compartment In the floor console is a power accessory outlet See Accessory Power Outlet s on page 4 15 for more information Convenience Net For vehicles with a convenience net it is located in the rear of the vehicle Use the convenience net to store small loads as far forward as possible The net should not be used to store heavy loads The vehicle may have a N power sliding sunroof The ignition must be on or in the a accessory position or Retained Accessory Power BEST RAP must be active See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 3 21 The switch used to operate the sunroof is located in the overhead console To open or close the sunroof press and hold the front or rear of the switch Sunshade Operation The sunshade will open automatically when opening the sunroof However it can manually be pulled shut after the sunroof is closed To adjust the sunshade push it backward or pull it forward to the desired position The sunshade cannot be adjusted further than the current closed position of the sunroof 3 37 Notice Forcing the sunshade forward of the sliding glass panel may cause damage and the sunroof may not operate properly Always close the glass panel before closing the sunshade Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time Debris can collect in the tracks and possibly damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system Retractable Hardtop
398. t operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning area Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety belt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt 4 27 Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag s electrical system for possible m
399. tant for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know 2 20 CE Ooo IN ge in N DA 5 Ss X W Q y f oe 8 ay xs a S Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as muc
400. tarting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The Content Theft Deterrent on engine can become so hot that it catches fire page 3 16 Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Z WARNING Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil 4 37 Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the d cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 4 7 for more information Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 4 5 for more information Fuel Gage Canada United States The fuel gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left when the ignition is on See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 4 39 for more information An arrow on th
401. tem in the vehicle 3 19 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Do not exceed 5 000 engine rpm Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings e Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 5 27 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased 3 20 Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer O LOCK OFF This is the only position from which you can remove the key The shift lever must be in P Park with the ignition in LOCK OFF to remove the key ACC ACC ACCESSOR
402. ternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 Battery Run Down Protection The battery run down feature is designed to protect the vehicle s battery When any interior lamp trunk reading lamps or dome lamp is left on when the ignition is turned off the battery run down protection system automatically shuts the lamp off after 20 minutes This prevents
403. th character in the VIN is the engine code This code identifies the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 125 for the vehicle s engine code Service Parts Identification Label This label on the inside of the glove box has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information e Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 72 and Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 2 72 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow etc the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Win
404. that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on th
405. the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system For vehicles with the remote start feature the climate control system functions as part of the remote start feature See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 A Fan Control B Recirculation C Temperature Control D Outside Air E Air Delivery Mode Control F Air Conditioning G Rear Window Defogger Sis Fan Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor Temperature Control Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle When it is cold outside 18 C 0 F or lower u
406. the cargo cover See Trunk on page 3 11 Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 38 and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 3 41 for more information CHECK GAS CAP This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully tightened Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it is on properly A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the message off CRUISE ENGAGED This message displays when the cruise control system is active See Cruise Control on page 4 7 for more information DOOR AJAR This message displays if one or more of the vehicle s doors are not closed properly Make sure that the door s are closed completely ENGINE DISABLED This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately ENG Engine PWR Power REDUCED This message displays to inform you that the vehicle has reduced engine power to avoid damaging the engine Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible ESC Electronic Stability Control
407. the current folder on the USB drive To browse and select files 1 Press the softkey below 2 Turn dd to scroll through the list of folders 3 Press dd to select the desired folder If there is more then one folder repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired folder is reached 4 Turn dd to scroll through the files in the selected folder 5 Press dd to select the desired file to be played To skip through large lists the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order First softkey first item in the list Second softkey 1 through the list each time the softkey is pressed Third softkey 5 through the list each time the softkey is pressed Fourth softkey 10 through the list each time the softkey is pressed Fifth softkey end of the list Music Navigator Press the softkey below to view and select a file on an iPod using the iPod s menu system Files are sorted by Playlists Artists Albums Genres Songs e Composers To select files 1 Press the softkey below 2 Turn dd to scroll through the list of menus 3 Press dd to select the desired menu 4 Turn dd to scroll through the folders or files in the selected menu 5 Press dd to select the desired file to be played To skip through large lists the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order First softkey first item in the list Second softkey 1 through the lis
408. the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals 6 38 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instructions before use If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing Adding Washer Fluid When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 42 for more information Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the reservoir is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for reservoir location Notice Brakes When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding Brake Fluid water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled Water can cause the solution to freeze and DOT 3 damage your washer fluid tank and other parts with DOT 3 brake fluid of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fillthe washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full MA Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer
409. till are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still cannot move the shift lever from P Park see your dealer retailer 3 31 Parking Over Things That Burn A WARNING Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts WARNING Continued The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completely sealed under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Z WARNING Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a gara
410. to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender 2 35 Child Restraints Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test z e Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend Older Children at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 2 28 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat
411. tomatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire wheel and other parts of the vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles Do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains will not fit the compact spare Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on the compact spare Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning the vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended U
412. trailer brakes are still working Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance 5 31 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on t
413. ts are installed 6 41 Battery Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 16 for battery location A DANGER Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling 6 42 Vehicle Storage A WARNING Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 6 43 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage Remove the black negative cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down See Power Window Initialization in Power Windows on page 3 14 Extended Storage Remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger Jump Starting If the vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely Z WARNING Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice Ignoring these ste
414. tuaew nenn 6 30 Courtesy Lamps sensorar areias ni 4 13 Courtesy Transportation Program 8 10 Coverage dreia eenia da nE A diners 8 8 Cruise COMMON 225 arie ser ayi a RN 4 7 Light isisisi ennenen rran aeae 4 38 Cupholders 22 iacesetiinsten thi oichicvirenteadaenecceeies 3 37 Current and Past Model Order Forms 8 16 Customer Assistance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee ees 8 6 OCES erien e tag acctuncse ERIE TE ELSE 8 6 Text Telephone TTY Users eeceeeeeeeeeeee 8 6 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 8 15 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 6 eeeeee 8 2 Damage Repair Collision eceeeeeeeeee eee 8 11 Data Recorders Event cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 17 Daytime Running Lamps DRL eee 4 11 Defensive Driving eceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenenees 5 2 Delayed Headlamps ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 11 Delayed LOCKING scenerne eee 3 9 Deleting Name Tags eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeees 4 76 Dinghy Towing From the Front ccecce 5 24 Dinghy Towing From the Rear ee 5 25 Disarming the System cceeeeeeeeee eee eee eee ees 3 17 Disc MPS ic sesscedessccteccedtersdneiensadaeieicevecieieee 4 63 Doing Your Own Service Work cee 6 5 Dolly Towing From the Front ee 5 26 Dolly Towing From the Rear ces 5 26 Dome LAMPS cccl
415. ures which can be found later in this owner manual Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m 195 feet away from the vehicle SA Press i to unlock the driver door Press again within five seconds to unlock all remaining doors 0 le Press to lock all doors Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized Press and hold for approximately one second to open the trunk Press J and release to locate the vehicle Press J and hold for three seconds to sound the panic alarm Press J again to cancel the panic alarm See Keys on page 3 2 and Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 3 3 Remote Vehicle Start Starting the Vehicle 1 Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle 2 Press eg 3 Immediately after completing Step 2 press and hold Q until the turn signal lamps flash When the vehicle starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes Repeat the steps for a 10 minute time extension Remote start can be extended only once Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers Turn the ignition switch on and then back to off See Re
416. ut Torque 140 Nem 100 Ib ft Transmission fluid capacity is approximate See Automatic Transmission Fluid 2 4L L4 3 5L V6 and 3 6L V6 Engines on page 6 27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid 3 9L V6 Engine on page 6 28 for information on checking fluid level All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual 6 126 Engine Specifications OO TT oe Spark Pug Gap 2 4L L4 Engine 1 01 mm 0 040 in 2 4L L4 Engine 1 01 mm 0 040 in 3 5L V6 Engine 1 01 mm 0 040 in 3 6L V6 Engine 1 01 mm 0 040 in 3 9L V6 Engine 1 01 mm 0 040 in i i i i 6 127 42 NOTES 6 128 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ccceseeeeee ee INMWOGUCHION zar neden Scheduled Maintenance ccccceeee cesses Owner Checks and Services cceceeeeeee ees Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 7 10 Maintenance Replacement Parts 65 7 11 Engine Drive Belt Routing cece 7 12 Maintenance Record 2 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 14 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections recommended fluids and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Proper vehicle maintenance helps to kee
417. ut what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger 5 10 Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin If the vehicle does not have a traction system or if the traction system is off an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal See Traction Control System TCS on page 5 6 and Electronic Stability Control ESC on page 5 5 If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on
418. utomatic headlamp system will turn on when it is not needed There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than this delay If vehicle is started in a dark garage the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately Once the vehicle leaves the garage it takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside During that delay the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 13 To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to the off on position For vehicles first sold in Canada the transmission must stay in P Park for this function The regular headlamps should be used when needed Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the button for this feature is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work 30 Press to turn the fog lamps on or off An indicator light comes on when the fog lamps are on The parking lamps autom
419. uts that hold the taillamp assembly Remove the taillamp assembly Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove Pull the bulb straight out of the socket Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall Reinstall the taillamp assembly and the two nuts that hold the taillamp assembly Reinstall the wing nuts holding the trunk trim Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker Stoplamps and Back up Lamps Coupe A Sidemarker Lamp B Stoplamp Taillamp Turn Signal Lamp C Back up Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 4 1 Open the trunk See Trunk on page 3 11 2 Remove the convenience net 3 Remove the two wing nuts from the trunk trim and pull back the trunk trim to expose the hex nuts 6 52 10 11 12 Remove the three hex nuts retaining the taillamp assembly Pull the assembly off to the side to release it from the rear of the vehicle Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from the taillamp assembly Pull the bulb from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall into the taillamp assembly Push the taillamp assembly back into the rear of the vehicle Reinstall the three hex nuts retaining the taillamp assembly Reinstall the trunk trim and the two wing nuts Taillamps Turn Signal Sidemarker To replace one of these bulbs Sto
420. w well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle s speed When going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your vehicle s speed down Applying the brakes does turn off the cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to disengage the cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Press the on off button The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster turns off when the system is disengaged Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Headlamps The band on the lever on the outboard side of the steering column operates the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has the following four positions ED Headlamps Turns on the headlamps parking lamps and taillamps 700 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps and taillamps only AUTO Automatic Headlamp System Automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps during daytime and the headlamps parking lamps and taillamps at night G Off On Turn the band to this position to turn on the Automatic Headlamp System In Canada this position only works when a vehicle is in the P
421. weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Ask your dealer retailer for trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8 6 for more information Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 5 18 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity Using a weight carrying hitch the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and th
422. wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you e start the engine e shift into a gear and e release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 3 for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 6 35 Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing If the vehicle gets a flat tire while towing a trailer be sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the vehicle before changing the tire 5 33 42 NOTES 5 34 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care SL ATAL e AE EREE E EE E A SEE Eee E 6 4 Accessories and Modifications
423. with or distort the incoming radio reception Any damage caused to your backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by the vehicle warranty XM Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof coupe and sedan or the rear retractable hardtop of the vehicle Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception Section 5 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 5 2 Defensive Driving cceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 5 2 DRUNK DIVING eisein ERE SEES 5 2 Control of a Vehicle W W ssseeeerererereere rene 5 3 Braking eenen e ea aE SEET 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS o ae 5 4 Braking in Emergencies ceeeeeeeeeeeee neers 5 5 Electronic Stability Control ESC ee 5 5 Traction Control System TCS o ae 5 6 SIEEN rr cise diet hr E EE RE 5 8 Off Road Recovery W u sssssererereeeere een eeeeeneees 5 9 PASSING serne E MEL EN 5 10 Loss of COMON iei canielsen de FEDERER Brda 5 10 Driving at NIG At icciceccieveteceskeuitheeschowedsameneesee 5 11 Driving Your Vehicle Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 5 12 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ee 5 13 Highway Hypnosis cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 13 Hill and Mountain Roads seeeeeeee erences 5 14 Winter Driving erete Ei 5 15 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or SNOW
424. y off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 6 11 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off 4 35 e If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasol
425. ycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insura
426. your vehicle and do not spin your wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go 6 81 It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provide
427. your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat review the following illustrations Depending on where you place the child restraint you may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints Configurations for Use of Child Restraints Sedan Only A B A B Child restraint using LATCH Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Occupant prohibited Child restraint using LATCH Child restraint using LATCH Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint using safety belt or LATCH or occupant using safety belt Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint using LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in acrash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the ve

warning - Pontiac

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents